Low Voltage A GE Power Controls Company. General catalogue

Transcription

1 Low Voltage A GE Power Controls Company General catalogue

2 this is a blanc page

3 Miniature circuit breakers A Miniature circuit breakers AC miniature circuit breakers Benefits of the new MCB s A 3 The AEG product offer A 4 Standards A 5 Technical data A 6 Short-circuit capacity A 7 3 ka E90N Char. B 2-40A A 8 Char. C 2-40A A ka E90E Char. B 2-40A A 9 Char. C 2-40A A 9 6 ka E90 Char. B 6-63A A 10 Char. C A A 10 Char. D A A ka E90S Char. B 6-63A A 12 Char. C A A 12 Char. D A A 12 6 ka E880 Char. B A A 14 Char. C A A 14 Char. D A A ka E880S Char. B A A 15 Char. C A A 15 Char. D A A ka E90X 3-5 In 6-63A A In A A In A A 16 AC/DC mini. circuit breakers Selective main miniature circuit breakers Add-on auxiliary contacts Accessories 6 ka E90SUC Char. B 6-63A A 17 Char. C A A ka, single pole switching S90 Char. CS A A 18 Char. E A A 18 Char. F A A 18 25kA, all-pole switching S90 Char. CS A A 19 A 20 A 21 A 1

4 A Miniature circuit breakers Five good reasons to appreciate the AEG miniature circuit breakers - Line protection - People protection 1. Total protection AEG Low Voltage MCB s provide the best answer to the obligation of circuit protection. They give comprehensive protection to circuits against: Overload currents (0.5A to 125A) Short-circuit currents (3000 up to A) Earth fault currents (30mA up to 1000mA) - combined with RCD s The handle being sealable or equipped with padlock bracket avoids dangerous operation changes (ON / OFF) The handle provides a clear indication of the contact position Top and bottom protection caps give save installation facilities Sealing accessories for top and bottom connections allow protection of original wiring Adequate printing of all data on the front provides long-term identification 2. Total quality The MCB s are able to accomplish the line protection for more than 10,000 times, by a simple manual, or motor operated reset The quality of the shells can cope with the hardest ambient circumstances (-25 C to +55 C) All MCB s are current limiting MCB s, the let-through energy being reduced far below the standard limits. Energy limiting class: 3 The low let-through peak-currents ensure the long life-time of the contacts of isolators or loadbreak switches upstream The emission of ionised gases are limited to the severest restrictions (35 mm grid distance) 3. A wide range AEG Low Voltage offers: MCB s for household in accordance with: IEC B, C and D tripping characteristics MCB s for industry in accordance with: IEC instantaneous tripping 3-5 In, 5-10 In, In RCD s in accordance with: IEC BS Stock reducing system The residential and industrial markets are covered by five appropriate series of MCB s: Series E. Their external advantages allow the consumer to extend the MCB at any time with: A wide range of RCD s / people protection Five types of display contacts Shunt trip releases Accessories 5. Time saving connections Insulated or non insulated busbar systems with maximum connection possibilities, can be very fast put on the top or bottom terminals of the MCB s. A 2

5 Miniature circuit breakers A Benefits of the new MCB s Series E90 Safety terminal: easy wiring no wrong fixing protection degree IP20 Pozidriv and slot screw head. Torque up to 4.5 N.m Incoming/outgoing terminal capacity up to 35 mm 2 or 2 x 16 mm 2 Terminal side for fork busbar is isolated between the poles. Two positions of the DIN-rail clip. Easy installation. MCB's and RCCB's can be connected with PIN type busbar at the top terminals. MCB's and RCCB's can be connected with PIN type busbar at the bottom terminals, with easy DIN-rail extraction. MCB's and RCCB's can be connected with FORK type busbar at the bottom terminals, with easy DIN-rail extraction. Auxiliary contacts can be added on the left hand side of the MCB. A 3

6 A Miniature circuit breakers The AEG Low Voltage offer Type Application Standard Short-circuit Series capacity AC Household and IEC E90N similar installations 4500 E90E 6000 E90 / E E90S / E880S S90 - Selective Industrial IEC kA E90X DC 12V to 110V Standard AC breakers See AC series 250V / 440V Special AC/DC Series E90SUC breakers Selection of MCB s depends on Distribution system: voltage, polarity,... Application, standards and approvals Prospective short-circuit current Required service / continuity Admissible current in the cable Expected inrush currents of load Rated current: equipment rating Rated voltage: number of poles for breaking Rated breaking capacity: short-circuit current at point of installation Type of system: earthed / insulated Standard IEC IEC Special DC Selective Short-circuit capacity Serial name Extension Instantaneous tripping Thermal setting (A) Ambient temperature Page kA E90N E90E E90 E90S E90X E90SUC S90 no yes yes yes yes yes on request B C B C B C D B C D 3/5 5/10 10/20 B C Cs E F x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x (1) (1) (1) (2) (2) (2) x x x (1) (1) (1) (2) (2) (2) x x x (1) (1) (1) (2) (2) (2) A.8 A.9 A.10 A.12 A.14 A.15 A.18 Polarity Standard available: 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P, 1P+N in 1 module (1) E880 range on A.14 (2) E880S range on A.15 A 4

7 Miniature circuit breakers A IEC 898 standard Circuit breakers are intended for the protection against overcurrents of wiring installations in buildings and similar applications: They are designed for use by uninstructed people and for not being maintained. Tripping characteristic curves IEC standard Low voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 2: circuit breakers This standard applies to circuit breakers, the main contacts of which are intended to be connected to circuits, the rated voltage of which does not exceed 1000V ac or 1500V dc. Circuit breakers for use in industrial environments (for use by instructed people). Tripping characteristic curves Magnetic release An electromagnet with plunger ensures instantaneous tripping in case of short circuit. The IEC 898 distinguishes three different types, following the current for instantaneous release: type B, C, D. Test Tripping current time B 3 In t G 0.1s 5 In t < 0.1s C 5 In t G 0.1s 10 In t < 0.1s D 10 In t G 0.1s 20 In t < 0.1s Test current Tripping time 1.13 In t 1h (In H 63A) t 2h (In > 63A) 1.45 In t < 1h (In H 63A) t < 2h (In > 63A) 2.55 In 1s < t < 60s (In H 32A) 1s < t < 120s (In > 32A) Applications Only for resistive loads such as: - electrical heating - water heater - stoves Usual loads such as: - lighting - socket outlets - small motors Control and protection of circuits having important transient inrush currents (large motors) Thermal release The release is initiated by a bimetal strip in case of overload. The standard defines the range of release for specific overload values. Reference ambient temperature is 30 C Magnetic release An electromagnet with plunger ensures instantaneous tripping in case of short circuit. The standard leaves the calibration of magnetic release to manufacturer s decision. AEG Low Voltage offers instantaneous tripping ranges release between 3 and 5 In release between 5 and 10 In release between 10 and 20 In Thermal release The release is initiated by a bimetal strip in case of overload. The standard defines the range of release for two special overload values. Reference ambient temperature is 40 C Test Tripping current time 1.05 In t 1h (In H 63A) t 2h (In > 63A) 1.30 In t <1h (In H 63A) t < 2h (In > 63A) A 5

8 A Miniature circuit breakers Technical data Series E90 Technical data Number of poles Width (mm) Depth (mm) Rated voltage (IEC) (V~) 230/ Highest rated current (1) (A) Number of switching operations at 230V, In, cosϕ = Insulation resistance (MΩ) >10 4 >10 4 >10 4 >10 4 Dielectric rigidity (kv) >2.5 >2.5 >2.5 >2.5 Terminals capacity (mm 2 ) 35/2x16 35/2x16 35/2x16 35/2x16 Influence of ambient temperature The thermal calibration of the MCB s was carried out at an ambient temperature of 30 C. Ambient temperatures different from 30 C influence the bimetal and this results in earlier or later thermal tripping (see curve). IEC 898, 30 C % In Use at D.C. At D.C. the magnetic tripping current is ± 40% higher than at A.C. Shock resistance (in x, y, z direction) 20g with shock duration of 10ms (minimum 18 shocks) 40g with shock duration of 5ms (minimum 18 shocks) Vibration resistance (in x, y, z direction) 3g in frequency range 10 to 55Hz (operating time at least 30 mins) according to IEC and DIN part 8 Storage temperature From -55 C up to + 55 C according to IEC 88 part 2-1 (duration 96 hours) Operating temperature From 5 up to 40 C according to IEC Use at 400Hz At 400Hz the magnetic tripping current is approximately 50% higher than at AC 50/60 Hz. Voltage drop and energy loss In(A) Voltage Energy drop (V) loss (W) C (1) Higher ratings up to 125A, see pages A.11 and A.13 On request per short-circuit capacity Let-through energy (I 2 t)-a 2 s Let-through peak currents (Id)-kA A 6

9 Miniature circuit breakers A Short-circuit capacity Series E91ENR - E91NR 1P+N in 1 module Short-circuit capacity (ka) E91ENR E91NR 1P+N 1P+N EN Icn Icn IEC Icn Icn Series E90N - E90E - E90 - E90S - E90X Short-circuit capacity (ka) E90N E90E E90 Un 1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 1P+N/2P 3P 3P+N/4P IEC Icn Icn Icn 230/240V IEC Icn Icn 240V V E90S E90X Un 1P 1P+N/2P 3P 3P+N/4P 1P 2P 3P 4P IEC Icn Icn (1) 230/240V /25/20/15 50/50/40/30 IEC Icn 50/25/20/15 240V V (1) 0.5-4A / 6-26A / 32, 40A / 50, 63A Series E90SUC special DC/AC (UC = Universal Current) Short-circuit capacity (ka) (1) E90SUC AC/DC acc. to EN Poles V Icn (ka) 1 & 2 230/ DC DC 6 (1) 50 and 63A: 4.5 ka A 7

10 A Miniature circuit breakers 3 ka AC MCB's Series E90N Acc. to DIN VDE 0641 and EN Thermal operating limit ( ) x In Magnetic operating: B: (3-5) x In C: (5-10) x In D: (10-20) x In NEW B C Rated Packing current [A] unit Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. 1-pole Pole width 18mm 2 12 E91N C E91N C E91N B E91N C E91N B E91N C E91N B E91N C E91N B E91N C E91N B E91N C E91N B E91N C E91N B E91N C pole Pole width 18mm 2 6 E92N C E92N C E92N B E92N C E92N B E92N C E92N B E92N C E92N B E92N C E92N B E92N C E92N B E92N C E92N B E92N C pole Pole width 18mm 2 4 E93N C E93N C E93N B E93N C E93N B E93N C E93N B E93N C E93N B E93N C E93N B E93N C E93N B E93N C E93N B E93N C pole Pole width 18mm 2 3 E94N C E94N C E94N B E94N C E94N B E94N C E94N B E94N C E94N B E94N C E94N B E94N C E94N B E94N C E94N B E94N C Accessories, see A 19 A 8

11 Miniature circuit breakers 4.5 ka AC MCB's A Series E90E Acc. to DIN VDE 0641 and EN Thermal operating limit ( ) x In Magnetic operating: B: (3-5) x In C: (5-10) x In D: (10-20) x In NEW B C Rated Packing current [A] unit Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. 1-pole Pole width 18mm 2 12 E91E C E91E C E91E B E91E C E91E B E91E C E91E B E91E C E91E B E91E C E91E B E91E C E91E B E91E C E91E B E91E C pole Pole width 18mm 2 6 E92E C E92E C E92E B E92E C E92E B E92E C E92E B E92E C E92E B E92E C E92E B E92E C E92E B E92E C E92E B E92E C pole Pole width 18mm 2 4 E93E C E93E C E93E B E93E C E93E B E93E C E93E B E93E C E93E B E93E C E93E B E93E C E93E B E93E C E93E B E93E C pole Pole width 18mm 2 3 E94E C E94E C E94E B E94E C E94E B E94E C E94E B E94E C E94E B E94E C E94E B E94E C E94E B E94E C E94E B E94E C P+N in one module 4.5 ka Pole width 18mm 6 12 E91ENR B E91ENR C E91ENR B E91ENR C E91ENR B E91ENR C E91ENR B E91ENR C E91ENR B E91ENR C E91ENR B E91ENR C Auxiliary contacts, see A 18 Accessories, see A 19 A 9

12 A Miniature circuit breakers 6 ka AC MCB's Series E90 to DIN VDE 0641 and EN Thermal operating limit ( ) x In Magnetic operating: B: (3-5) x In C: (5-10) x In D: (10-20) x In B C D Rated Packing Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. current [A] unit 1-pole E91 B E91 B E91 B E91 B E91 B E91 B E91 B E91 B E91 B E91 B E91 C E91 C E91 C E91 C E91 C E91 C E91 C E91 C E91 C E91 C E91 C E91 C E91 C E91 C E91 C E91 D E91 D E91 D E91 D E91 D E91 D E91 D E91 D E91 D E91 D E91 D E91 D E91 D E91 D E91 D pole E92 B E92 B E92 B E92 B E92 B E92 B E92 B E92 B E92 B E92 B E92 C E92 C E92 C E92 C E92 C E92 C E92 C E92 C E92 C E92 C E92 C E92 C E92 C E92 C E92 C E92 D E92 D E92 D E92 D E92 D E92 D E92 D E92 D E92 D E92 D E92 D E92 D E92 D E92 D E92 D pole E93 B E93 B E93 B E93 B E93 B E93 B E93 B E93 B E93 B E93 B E93 C E93 C E93 C E93 C E93 C E93 C E93 C E93 C E93 C E93 C E93 C E93 C E93 C E93 C E93 C E93 D E93 D E93 D E93 D E93 D E93 D E93 D E93 D E93 D E93 D E93 D E93 D E93 D E93 D E93 D pole E94 B E94 B E94 B E94 B E94 B E94 B E94 B E94 B E94 B E94 B E94 C E94 C E94 C E94 C E94 C E94 C E94 C E94 C E94 C E94 C E94 C E94 C E94 C E94 C E94 C E94 D E94 D E94 D E94 D E94 D E94 D E94 D E94 D E94 D E94 D E94 D E94 D E94 D E94 D E94 D Special versions for shipbuilding, railways, etc. on request Auxiliary contacts, see A 18 Accessories, see A 19 A 10

13 Miniature circuit breakers 6 ka AC MCB's A Series E90 to DIN VDE 0641 and EN Thermal operating limit ( ) x In Magnetic operating: B: (3-5) x In C: (5-10) x In D: (10-20) x In B C D Rated Packing Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. current [A] unit 1P+N E91 C0.5 N E91N D E91 C01 N E91N D E91 C02 N E91N D E91 C03 N E91N D E91 C04 N E91N D E91N B E91 C06 N E91N D E91N B E91 C10 N E91N D E91N B E91 C13 N E91N D E91N B E91 C16 N E91N D E91N B E91 C20 N E91N D E91N B E91 C25 N E91N D E91N B E91 C32 N E91N D E91N B E91 C40 N E91N D E91N B E91 C50 N E91N D E91N B E91 C63 N E91N D P+N E93N B E93N B E93N B E93N B E93N B E93N B E93N B E93N B E93N B E93N B E93 C0.5 N E93 C01 N E93 C02 N E93 C03 N E93 C04 N E93 C06 N E93 C10 N E93 C13 N E93 C16 N E93 C20 N E93 C25 N E93 C32 N E93 C40 N E93 C50 N E93 C63 N E93N D E93N D E93N D E93N D E93N D E93N D E93N D E93N D E93N D E93N D E93N D E93N D E93N D E93N D E93N D P+N in one module 6 ka Pole width 18mm 6 12 E91NR B E91NR C E91NR B E91NR C E91NR B E91NR C E91NR B E91NR C E91NR B E91NR C E91NR B E91NR C E91NR B E91NR C Special versions for shipbuilding, railways, etc. on request Auxiliary contacts, see A 18 Accessories, see A 19 A 11

14 A Miniature circuit breakers 10 ka AC MCB's Series E90S to DIN VDE 0641 and EN Thermal operating limit ( ) x In Magnetic operating: B: (3-5) x In C: (5-10) x In D: (10-20) x In B C D Rated Packing Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. current [A] unit 1-pole E91S B E91S B E91S B E91S B E91S B E91S B E91S B E91S B E91S B E91S B E91S C E91S C E91S C E91S C E91S C E91S C E91S C E91S C E91S C E91S C E91S C E91S C E91S C E91S C E91S C E91S D E91S D E91S D E91S D E91S D E91S D E91S D E91S D E91S D E91S D E91S D E91S D E91S D E91S D E91S D pole E92S B E92S B E92S B E92S B E92S B E92S B E92S B E92S B E92S B E92S B E92S C E92S C E92S C E92S C E92S C E92S C E92S C E92S C E92S C E92S C E92S C E92S C E92S C E92S C E92S C E92S D E92S D E92S D E92S D E92S D E92S D E92S D E92S D E92S D E92S D E92S D E92S D E92S D E92S D E92S D pole E93S B E93S B E93S B E93S B E93S B E93S B E93S B E93S B E93S B E93S B E93S C E93S C E93S C E93S C E93S C E93S C E93S C E93S C E93S C E93S C E93S C E93S C E93S C E93S C E93S C E93S D E93S D E93S D E93S D E93S D E93S D E93S D E93S D E93S D E93S D E93S D E93S D E93S D E93S D E93S D pole E94S B E94S B E94S B E94S B E94S B E94S B E94S B E94S B E94S B E94S B E94S C E94S C E94S C E94S C E94S C E94S C E94S C E94S C E94S C E94S C E94S C E94S C E94S C E94S C E94S C E94S D E94S D E94S D E94S D E94S D E94S D E94S D E94S D E94S D E94S D E94S D E94S D E94S D E94S D Special versions for shipbuilding, railways, etc. on request Auxiliary contacts, see A 18 Accessories, see A 19 A 12

15 Miniature circuit breakers 10 ka AC MCB's A Series E90S to DIN VDE 0641 and EN Thermal operating limit ( ) x In Magnetic operating: B: (3-5) x In C: (5-10) x In D: (10-20) x In B C D Rated Packing Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. current [A] unit 1P+N E91SN B E91SN B E91SN B E91SN B E91SN B E91SN B E91SN B E91SN B E91SN B E91SN B E91S C0.5 N E91S C01 N E91S C02 N E91S C03 N E91S C04 N E91S C06 N E91S C10 N E91S C13 N E91S C16 N E91S C20 N E91S C25 N E91S C32 N E91S C40 N E91S C50 N E91S C63 N E91SN D E91SN D E91SN D E91SN D E91SN D E91SN D E91SN D E91SN D E91SN D E91SN D E91SN D E91SN D E91SN D E91SN D E91SN D P+N E93SN B E93SN B E93SN B E93SN B E93SN B E93SN B E93SN B E93SN B E93SN B E93SN B E93S C0.5 N E93S C01 N E93S C02 N E93S C03 N E93S C04 N E93S C06 N E93S C10 N E93S C13 N E93S C16 N E93S C20 N E93S C25 N E93S C32 N E93S C40 N E93S C50 N E93S C63 N E93SN D E93SN D E93SN D E93SN D E93SN D E93SN D E93SN D E93SN D E93SN D E93SN D E93SN D E93SN D E93SN D E93SN D E93SN D Special versions for shipbuilding, railways, etc. on request Auxiliary contacts, see A 18 Accessories, see A 19 A 13

16 A Miniature circuit breakers 6 ka AC MCB's Series E880 to DIN VDE 0641 and EN Thermal operating limit ( ) x In Magnetic operating: B: (3-5) x In C: (5-10) x In D: (10-20) x In Pole width 27 mm B C D Rated Packing Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. current [A] unit 1-pole 80 8 E881 B E881 B E881 B E881 C E881 C E881 C E881 D E881 D E881 D pole 80 4 E882 B E882 B E882 B E882 C E882 C E882 C E882 D E882 D E882 D pole 80 2 E883 B E883 B E883 B E883 C E883 C E883 C E883 D E883 D E883 D pole 80 2 E884 B E884 B E884 B E884 C E884 C E884 C E884 D E884 D E884 D Special versions for shipbuilding, railways, etc. on request Auxiliary contacts, see A 18 A 14

17 Miniature circuit breakers 10 ka AC MCB's A Series E880S to DIN VDE and EN Thermal operating limit ( ) x In, Magnetic operating: B: (3-5) x In C: (5-10) x In D: (10-20) x In Pole width 27mm B C D * Rated Packing Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. current [A] unit 1-pole 80 8 E881S B E881S B E881S B E881S C E881S C E881S C E881S D E881S D100 E881S D pole 80 4 E882S B E882S B E882S B E882S C E882S C E882S C E882S D E882S D E882S D pole 80 2 E883S B E883S B E883S B E883S C E883S C E883S C E883S D E883S D E883S D pole 80 2 E884S B E884S B E884S B E884S C E884S C E884S C E884S D E884S D E884S D (*) Rated breaking capacity 7.5 ka to DIN EN Auxiliary contacts, see A 18 A 15

18 A Miniature circuit breakers 25 ka AC MCB's (1) Series E90X According to EN Thermal operating limit ( ) In Magnetic Operating: Equivalent to B-C-D-characteristics NEW 3-5 In (B) 5-10 In (C) In (D) NRated Packing Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. current [A] unit 1-pole E91X B E91X B E91X B E91X B E91X B E91X B E91X B E91X B E91X B E91X B E91X C E91X C E91X C E91X C E91X C E91X C E91X C E91X C E91X C E91X C E91X C E91X C E91X C E91X C E91X C E91X D E91X D E91X D E91X D E91X D E91X D E91X D E91X D E91X D E91X D E91X D E91X D E91X D E91X D E91X D pole E92X B E92X B E92X B E92X B E92X B E92X B E92X B E92X B E92X B E92X B E92X C E92X C E92X C E92X C E92X C E92X C E92X C E92X C E92X C E92X C E92X C E92X C E92X C E92X C E92X C E92X D E92X D E92X D E92X D E92X D E92X D E92X D E92X D E92X D E92X D E92X D E92X D E92X D E92X D E92X D pole E93X B E93X B E93X B E93X B E93X B E93X B E93X B E93X B E93X B E93X B E93X C E93X C E93X C E93X C E93X C E93X C E93X C E93X C E93X C E93X C E93X C E93X C E93X C E93X C E93X C E93X D E93X D E93X D E93X D E93X D E93X D E93X D E93X D E93X D E93X D E93X D E93X D E93X D E93X D E93X D pole E94X B E94X B E94X B E94X B E94X B E94X B E94X B E94X B E94X B E94X B E94X C E94X C E94X C E94X C E94X C E94X C E94X C E94X C E94X C E94X C E94X C E94X C E94X C E94X C E94X C E94X D E94X D E94X D E94X D E94X D E94X D E94X D E94X D E94X D E94X D E94X D E94X D E94X D E94X D E94X D Auxiliary contacts, see A 18 (1) In 4 Icu = 50kA Accessories, see A 19 4A < In 25A Icu = 25kA 25A < In 40A Icu = 20kA A 16 40A < In 63A Icu = 15kA

19 Miniature circuit breakers 6 ka AC/DC MCB's A Series E90SUC B acc. to DIN VDE 0641 and EN C acc. to DIN VDE Thermal operating limit ( ) x In Magnetic operating limit B: (3-5) x In C: (5-10) x In 1-pole 2-pole B C Rated Packing current [A] unit Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. 0,5 10 E91S UC C E91S UC C E91S UC C E91S UC C E91S UC C E91S UC B E91S UC C E91S UC B E91S UC C E91S UC B E91S UC C E91S UC B E91S UC C E91S UC B E91S UC C E91S UC B E91S UC C E91S UC B E91S UC C E91S UC B E91S UC C E91S UC B E91S UC C E91S UC B E91S UC C E91S UC B E91S UC C ,5 6 E92S UC C E92S UC C E92S UC C E92S UC C E92S UC C E92S UC B E92S UC C E92S UC B E92S UC C E92S UC B E92S UC C E92S UC B E92S UC C E92S UC B E92S UC C E92S UC B E92S UC C E92S UC B E92S UC C E92S UC B E92S UC C E92S UC B E92S UC C E92S UC B E92S UC C E92S UC B E92S UC C Auxiliary contacts, see A 18 Accessories, see A 19 A 17

20 A Miniature circuit breakers Selective main miniature circuit breakers, single-pole switching Series S90 Cs-E-F characteristics, 25kA Cs and F acc. to DIN VDE E acc. to DIN VDE Pole width 27mm Cs E F Rated Packing Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. current [A] unit 1-pole S91 CS S91 CS S91 CS S91 CS S91 CS S91 CS S91 CS S91 CS S91 CS S91 E S91 E S91 E S91 E S91 E S91 E S91 E S91 E S91 E S91 E S91 E S91 F S91 F S91 F S91 F S91 F S91 F S91 F S91 F S91 F S91 F S91 F x 1-pole 20 1 S91.3 CS S91.3 CS S91.3 CS S91.3 CS S91.3 CS S91.3 CS S91.3 CS S91.3 CS S91.3 CS S91.3 E S91.3 E S91.3 E S91.3 E S91.3 E S91.3 E S91.3 E S91.3 E S91.3 E S91.3 F S91.3 F S91.3 F S91.3 F S91.3 F S91.3 F S91.3 F S91.3 F S91.3 F Thermal operating limit: Cs: ( ) x In E: ( ) x In F: ( ) x In Magnetic operating limit: Cs: (6.5-10) x In E: (5-6.5) x In F: (6.5-10) x In Accessories, see A 19 A 18

21 Miniature circuit breakers Selective main miniature circuit breakers, all-pole switching A Series S90 Cs-characteristic, 25kA to DIN VDE Thermal operating limit ( ) x In Magnetic operating limit (6.5-10) x In Pole width 27mm 1P+N Cs Rated Packing Designation Ref. No. current [A] unit 20 2 S91+N CS S91+N CS S91+N CS S91+N CS S91+N CS S91+N CS S91+N CS S91+N CS S91+N CS pole 20 1 S93 CS S93 CS S93 CS S93 CS S93 CS S93 CS S93 CS S93 CS S93 CS P+N 20 1 S93+N CS S93+N CS S93+N CS S93+N CS S93+N CS S93+N CS S93+N CS S93+N CS S93+N CS Accessories, see A 19 A 19

22 A Miniature circuit breakers Add-on auxiliary contacts Description Width Packing Designation Ref. No. [mm] unit Auxiliary contact block to be coupled to Series E880 1CO 9 10 H to be coupled to Series E90 (except E90N), EFI, EHFI, D/HD90 1CO 9 10 H Fault-signal or auxiliary contact block to be coupled to Series E880 1CO 9 10 S/H Fault-signal switch with acknowledgement button to be coupled to Series E880 1CO 9 10 SR to be coupled to Series E90 (except E90N), EFI, EHFI, D/HD90 1CO 9 10 S/H CO 9 10 SRH/HH Miniature circuit breakers interlock Panelboard switch 9 10 NLVS Remote release to be coupled to Series E90 (Except E90N), EFI, EHFI, D/HD90 AC 24-60V, DC 24-48V NF AC V, DC V NF Undervoltage trip to be coupled to Series E90 (Except E90N), EFI, EHFI, D/HD90 can be subsequently fitted to both sides of miniature circuit breakers (not to Series S90) AC 230V 18 1 NUVR AC/DC 12V 18 1 NUVR AC/DC 24V 18 1 NUVR AC/DC 48V 18 1 NUVR Remote drive to be coupled to Series E90 (Except E90N), EFI, EHFI, D/HD90 1 NFA A 20

23 Miniature circuit breakers A Accessories Description Packing Designation Ref. No. unit For Series E90 Padlocking bracket for E90 + S90 2 KS Sealing plate for 4 poles 10 EPP For Series S90 Disconnect inhibiter for series S90, 3-pole to lock the mcb from disconnecting 10 AST Actuation inhibiter for series S90, 3-pole to seal or inhibit the toggle in the open or closed state 10 BST Busbar adapter for S90 1-pole (up to 63A) 6 SAV Masking strip for lower meter wiring space lockable 10 VST Accessory forn-connection S90 Ferrule 12/18mm, 300mm long, 2.5mm 2 10 ZE3 2, Enclosure, grey with base plate and mounting rail to DIN EN /05.78 sealable, protection degree IP20 1- or 2-pole 1 GH Enclosure, watertight with base plate and mounting rail to DIN EN /05.78 sealable, protection degree IP54 1 LGW A 21

24 A Notes A 22

25 Residual current circuit breakers B Residual current circuit breakers Association B 2 Coordination B 3 Power losses B 3 Residual current circuit breakers EHFI Type A B 4 EFI Type AC B 4 ESHFI Type S B 4 EGFI Type AC B 5 EHFI...F Type A B 5 EFI...F Type AC B 5 EFI...S Type AC B 5 VPFI Type A B 5 Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent trip Add-on residual current circuit breakers HD90 Type A B 6 D90 Type AC B 6 DE90 Type AC B 8 HD92 Type A B 7 D92 Type AC B 7 HDS92 Type A B 7 DS92 Type AC B 8 B 1

26 B Residual current circuit breakers Association of RCCB s With MCB's - Back-up protection Series EFI/EHFI 2 poles 230V Series EFI/EHFI 4 poles 400V E90N E90E E90 E90S E90X E880 S90 16A 3 ka 4.5 ka 10 ka 20 ka 20 ka 10 ka 25 ka 25A 3 ka 4.5 ka 10 ka 20 ka 20 ka 10 ka 25 ka 40A 3 ka 4.5 ka 10 ka 20 ka 20 ka 10 ka 25 ka 63A 20 ka 20 ka 10 ka 25 ka 80A 10 ka 25 ka 100A 10 ka 25 ka 25A 3 ka 4.5 ka 6 ka 10 ka 10 ka 10 ka 25 ka 40A 3 ka 4.5 ka 6 ka 10 ka 10 ka 10 ka 25 ka 63A 10 ka 10 ka 10 ka 25 ka 80A 10 ka 25 ka 100A 10 ka 25 ka With fuses gl-gg - Back-up protection Series EFI/EHFI 2 poles 230V Series EFI/EHFI 4 poles 400V 16A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A 80A 100A 16A 100 ka 100 ka 80 ka 50 ka 40 ka 25 ka 16 ka 10 ka 25A 100 ka 100 ka 80 ka 50 ka 40 ka 25 ka 16 ka 10 ka 40A 100 ka 100 ka 80 ka 50 ka 40 ka 25 ka 16 ka 10 ka 63A 100 ka 100 ka 80 ka 50 ka 40 ka 25 ka 16 ka 10 ka 80A 100 ka 100 ka 80 ka 50 ka 40 ka 25 ka 16 ka 10 ka 100A 100 ka 100 ka 80 ka 50 ka 40 ka 25 ka 16 ka 10 ka 25A 100 ka 100 ka 80 ka 50 ka 40 ka 25 ka 16 ka 10 ka 40A 100 ka 100 ka 80 ka 50 ka 40 ka 25 ka 16 ka 10 ka 63A 100 ka 100 ka 80 ka 50 ka 40 ka 25 ka 16 ka 10 ka 80A 100 ka 100 ka 80 ka 50 ka 40 ka 25 ka 16 ka 10 ka 100A 100 ka 100 ka 80 ka 50 ka 40 ka 25 ka 16 ka 10 ka The values indicated in the table are the maximun short-circuit current in ka rms SCPD: Short-Circuit Protective Device (MCB or fuse) B 2

27 Residual current circuit breakers B Coordination of RCCB s UPSTREAM PROTECTION MCB's Fuses Series EFI / EHFI E90 E90S E90S E90X E90X E880 S90 Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse H40A H40A >40A H40A >40A A 160A 250A 400A 630A E90 6 ka 10 ka 10 ka 10 ka 10 ka 25 ka H 25A DOWNSTREAM E90S 25 ka 25 ka 25 ka 25 ka 10 ka 25 ka 16 ka 10 ka 10 ka 10 ka H 25A E90S 25 ka 25 ka 25 ka 25 ka 10 ka 25 ka 10 ka 10 ka 10 ka 10 ka > 25A Fuse 100 ka 100 ka 100 ka 100 ka 100 ka 100 ka 100 ka 100 ka 100 ka 100 ka 100 ka 25A Power losses D90/HD90 Z mohm W/pole 4A A A A A A A A EFI/EHFI Z mohm W/pole 16A A A A A A Add on D/HD92 Z mohm W/pole 32/ / / / / / / / B 3

28 B Residual current circuit breakers Series EHFI For pulsanting DC and AC fault currents Series EFI For sinusoidal AC fault currents Series ESHFI Time delayed trip for pulsanting DC and AC fault currents Acc. to IEC NEW EHFI Type A EFI Type AC Rated Rated Packing current [A] fault current [A] unit Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. Resistance to surge currents up to 250A Resistance to surge currents up to 500A 2 poles, V 4 poles, V 2 poles, V 4 poles, V EHFI16/ EFI16/ EHFI25/ DFI25/ EHFI40/ DFI40/ EHFI63/ EFI63/ EHFI80/ EFI80/ EHFI100/ EFI100/ EHFI25/ EFI25/ EHFI40/ EFI40/ EHFI63/ EFI63/ EHFI80/ EFI80/ EHFI100/ EFI100/ EHFI25/ DFI25/ EHFI40/ DFI40/ EHFI63/ EFI63/ EHFI80/ EFI80/ EHFI100/ EFI100/ EHFI25/ EFI25/ EHFI40/ EFI40/ EHFI63/ EFI63/ EHFI80/ EFI80/ EHFI100/ EFI100/ EHFI25/ EFI25/ EHFI40/ EFI40/ EHFI63/ EFI63/ EHFI80/ EFI80/ EHFI100/ EFI100/ EHFI25/ EFI25/ EHFI40/ EFI40/ EHFI63/ EFI63/ EHFI80/ EFI80/ EHFI100/ EFI100/ EHFI25/ EFI25/ EHFI40/ EFI40/ EHFI63/ EFI63/ EHFI80/ EFI80/ EHFI100/ EFI100/ EHFI25/ EFI25/ EHFI40/ EFI40/ EHFI63/ EFI63/ EHFI80/ EFI80/ EHFI100/ EFI100/ ESHFI Type S ESHFI25/ ESHFI40/ ESHFI63/ ESHFI80/ ESHFI100/ ESHFI25/ ESHFI40/ ESHFI63/ ESHFI80/ ESHFI100/ ESHFI25/ ESHFI40/ ESHFI63/ ESHFI80/ ESHFI100/ ESHFI25/ ESHFI40/ ESHFI63/ ESHFI80/ ESHFI100/ For extensions see page A 18 B 4

29 Residual current circuit breakers B Series EGFI 10 ms time delayed trip for sinusoidal AC fault currents Series EHFI...F For pulsanting DC and AC fault currents it can be protected by fuses of the same rated current Series EFI...F For sinusoidal AC fault currents it can be protected by fuses of the same rated current Series EFI...S For sinusoidal AC fault currents. Operates at -25 ºC NEW Type A Type AC Rated Rated Packing current [A] fault current [A] unit Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. Resistance to surge currents up to 3000A G 2 poles V EGFI EGFI25/ EGFI40/ EGFI63/ EGFI25/ EGFI40/ EGFI63/ Can be protected by fuses of the same rated current 4 poles V 4 poles V EGFI25/ EGFI40/ EGFI63/ EGFI25/ EGFI40/ EGFI63/ EHFI...F EFI...F EHFI40/030-4F EFI40/030-4F EHFI63/030-4F EFI63/030-4F EHFI40/100-4F EFI40/100-4F EHFI63/100-4F EFI63/100-4F EFI63/300-4F S ESHF40/300-4F Operates at -25 C G 2 poles V EGFI40/030-4F EFI...S DFI25/030-2S DFI40/030-2S EFI63/030-2S DFI25/300-2S DFI40/300-2S EFI63/300-2S poles V EFI25/030-4S EFI40/030-4S EFI63/030-4S EFI25/300-4S EFI40/300-4S EFI63/300-4S For extensions see A 18 B 5

30 B Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection 6 ka Series HD90 For pulsanting DC and AC fault currents Series D90 For sinusoidal AC fault currents Acc. to IEC NEW Type A Type AC Rated Rated Packing current [A] fault current [ma] unit Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. B Characteristic Thermal operating limit: x In Magnetic operating limit: 3-5 x In Resistance to surge currents up to 250A C Characteristic Thermal operating limit: x In Magnetic operating limit: 5-10 x In Resistance to surge currents up to 250A 1P+N, 230V 1P+N, 230V HD HD90 B06/ D90 B06/ HD90 B10/ D90 B10/ HD90 B13/ D90 B13/ HD90 B16/ D90 B16/ HD90 B20/ D90 B20/ HD90 B06/ D90 B06/ HD90 B10/ D90 B10/ HD90 B13/ D90 B13/ HD90 B16/ D90 B16/ HD90 B20/ D90 B20/ HD90 B25/ D90 B25/ HD90 B32/ D90 B32/ HD90 B40/ D90 B40/ HD90 B06/ D90 B06/ HD90 B10/ D90 B10/ HD90 B13/ D90 B13/ HD90 B16/ D90 B16/ HD90 B20/ D90 B20/ HD90 B25/ D90 B25/ HD90 B32/ D90 B32/ HD90 B40/ D90 B40/ HD90 C04/ D90 C04/ HD90 C06/ D90 C06/ HD90 C10/ D90 C10/ HD90 C13/ D90 C13/ HD90 C16/ D90 C16/ HD90 C20/ D90 C20/ HD90 C04/ D90 C04/ HD90 C06/ D90 C06/ HD90 C10/ D90 C10/ HD90 C13/ D90 C13/ HD90 C16/ D90 C16/ HD90 C20/ D90 C20/ HD90 C25/ D90 C25/ HD90 C32/ D90 C32/ HD90 C40/ D90 C40/ HD90 C04/ D90 C04/ HD90 C06/ D90 C06/ HD90 C10/ D90 C10/ HD90 C13/ D90 C13/ HD90 C16/ D90 C16/ HD90 C20/ D90 C20/ HD90 C25/ D90 C25/ HD90 C32/ D90 C32/ HD90 C40/ D90 C40/ D90 Electronic residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection 6 ka Series DE90 For sinusoidal AC fault currents Acc. to IEC NEW Type A Type AC Rated Rated Packing current [A] fault current [ma] unit Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. Characteristic C 1P+N DE90 C06/ DE90 C10/ DE90 C16/ DE90 C20/ DE90 C25/ DE90 C32/ DE90 C40/ For extensions see A 18 B 6

31 Add-on residual current circuit breakers B Series HD92 For pulsanting DC and AC fault currents Series D92 For sinusoidal AC fault currents Series HDS92 Time delayed trip for pulsanting DC and AC fault currents To be added on MCB Series E90 Acc. to IEC NEW Type A Type AC Rated Rated Packing current [A] fault current [A] unit Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No. Resistance to surge currents up to 250A 2 poles 230/400V HD HD92 32/ D92 32/ HD92 32/ D92 32/ HD92 63/ D92 63/ HD92 63/ D92 63/ D92 4 poles 230/400V HD95 32/ D95 32/ HD95 32/ D95 32/ HD94 63/ D94 63/ HD94 63/ D94 63/ Resistance to surge currents up to 5000A (delay disconnected) 2 poles 230/400V HDS HDS92 32/ HDS92 63/ poles 230/400V HDS94 32/ HDS94 63/ B 7

32 B Add-on residual current circuit breakers Series HD92 For pulsanting DC and AC fault currents Series D92 For sinusoidal AC fault currents Series HDS92 Time delayed trip for pulsating DC and AC fault currents Series DS92 Time delayed trip for sinusoidal AC fault currents To be added on MCB s Series E880 Acc. to IEC poles 3 poles 4 poles Type A Type AC Rated Rated Packing current [A] fault current [ma] unit Designation Ref. No. Designation Ref. No HD92 125/ D92 125/ HD92 125/ D92 125/ HD93 125/ D93 125/ HD93 125/ D93 125/ HD94 125/ D94 125/ HD94 125/ D94 125/ Delay disconnected 2 poles HDS92 125/ DS92 125/ poles HDS93 125/ DS93 125/ HDS93 125/ DS93 125/ poles HDS94 125/ DS94 125/ HDS94 125/ DS94 125/ B 8

33 Busbar systems for MCB's C Busbar system type EV Fork type (G) C 2 Pin type (S) C 3 Accessories C 4 C 1

34 C Busbar systems for MCB's Busbar systems type EV, fork type Circuits Designation Packing E-No. Connectors unit Busbars for 1-phase connection 1 x 2 = 2 EV-G x 6 = 6 EV-G x 12 = 12 EV-G Hi x 2 = 2 1 x 2 = 2DO/27 EV-G 1+Hi Hi x 6 = 6 1 x 6 = 6DO/27 EV-G 1+Hi Hi x 8 = 8 1 x 8 = 8DO/27 EV-G 1+Hi Hi x 9 = 9 1 x 9 = 9DO/27 EV-G 1+Hi Busbars for 2-phase connection 2 x 2 = 4 EV-G x 3 = 6 EV-G x 6 = 12 EV-G Hi x 2 = 4 EV-G 2+Hi Hi x 3 = 6 EV-G 2+Hi Hi x 5 = 10 EV-G 2+Hi Busbars for 3-phase connection 3 x 2 = 6 EV-G x 3 = 9 EV-G x 4 = 12 EV-G Hi x 2 = 6 EV-G 3+HI Hi x 4 = 12 EV-G 3+HI x 2 = 6DO/27 3 x 1 + Hi x 2 = 6 EV-G 3.1+Hi x 3 = 9DO/27 3 x 1 + Hi x 3 = 9 EV-G 3.1+Hi Busbars for 4-phase connection 4 x 2 = 8 EV-G x 3 = 12 EV-G (L1 + N, L2 + N, L3 + N) x 2 = 12 EV-G 3.1+N (L1 + N, L2 + N, L3 + N) x 3 = 18 EV-G 3.1+N Busbars for 4-pole residual current circuit breaker and 5 (8) miniature circuit breakers 3/N x 3 = 1Fi/5LS EV-G 3/N /N x 4 = 1Fi/8LS EV-G 3/N Contact guard yellow (RAL 1004) alinguable EV-BS 10x C 2

35 Busbar systems for MCB's C Busbar systems type EV, pin type Circuits Designation Packing E-No. Connectors unit Busbars for 1-phase connection 1 x 2 = 2 EV-S x 6 = 6 EV-S x 12 = 12 EV-S Hi x 2 = 2 1 x 2 = 2DO/27 EV-S 1+Hi Hi x 6 = 6 1 x 6 = 6DO/27 EV-S 1+Hi Hi x 8 = 8 1 x 8 = 8DO/27 EV-S 1+Hi Hi x 9 = 9 1 x 9 = 9DO/27 EV-S 1+Hi Busbars for 2-phase connection 2 x 2 = 4 EV-S x 3 = 6 EV-S x 6 = 12 EV-S Hi x 2 = 4 EV-S 2+Hi Hi x 3 = 6 EV-S 2+Hi Hi x 5 = 10 EV-S 2+Hi Busbars for 3-phase connection 3 x 2 = 6 EV-S x 3 = 9 EV-S x 4 = 12 EV-S Hi x 2 = 6 EV-S 3+Hi Hi x 4 = 12 EV-S 3+Hi x 1 Hi x 2 = 6 3 x 2 = 6DO/27 EV-S Hi x 1 Hi x 3 = 9 3 x 3 = 9DO/27 EV-S Hi Busbars for 4-phase connection 4 x 2 = 8 EV-S x 3 = 12 EV-S (L1 + N, L2 + N, L3 + N) x 2 = 12 EV-S 3.1+N (L1 + N, L2 + N, L3 + N) x 2 = 18 EV-S 3.1+N Busbars for 4-pole residual current circuit breaker and 5 (8) miniature circuit breakers 3/N x 3 = 1Fi/5LS EV-S 3/N /N x 3 = 1Fi/8LS EV-S 3/N C 3

36 C Busbar systems for MCB's Accessories Version Designation Packing E-No. unit Infeed terminals for fork AS 25 GI for pin AS 25 SI for pin, long AS 25 SLI alignable for fork and pin ES/35 S/G Busbars for 1-phase connection universal, for mcb's and Neozed 12 connections U connections U connections U connections U Busbars for 3-phase connection for fork type, incl. 10 end caps 19 x 3 connections GM x 3 connections GM End caps for 3-phase busbars GM3 EK Busbar, insulated for 3-phase connection of DO-Elements 27mm or 1-pole LS- with auxiliary contact block 13 x 3 connections fork type GM3.1+Hi x 3 connections pin type S3.1+Hi Auxiliary contact block busbar, insulated pin connection, pins can be cut to length for auxiliary contact block fitted to mcb's, 1-pole SH for auxiliary contact block fitted to mcb's, 2-pole SH for auxiliary contact block fitted to mcb's, 3-pole SH C 4

37 Comfort functions - Energy control D Modular devices for DIN-rail mounting Switches & Push-buttons D 2 Indication lamp D 3 Socket outlet D 3 Priority relay D 3 Contactors D 4 Relays D 5 Impuls switches D 6 Staircase switches D 7 Time relays D 8 Analogue time switches D 9 Digital time switches D 10 Light sensitive switches D 11 Transformers D 12 Analogue measurement instruments D 13 Digital measurement instruments D 14 Surge arresters D 15 D 1

38 D Comfort functions - Energy control Switches & Push-buttons Standards Mains disconnect switches A BS EN VDE 0632 Part 101 Switches 16/32A BS EN VDE 0632 Part 1 Function Manual control of all kinds of electrical devices. Applications Switching of lighting and heating in homes, shops, offices, warehouses, factories, hospitals, etc. Nominal Contact Number Packing Designation Ref. No. current combination of modules unit Mains disconnect switch 40A/240V 1NO 1 12 ASR A/415V 2NO 2 6 ASR A/415V 3NO 3 4 ASR A/415V 4NO 4 3 ASR A/240V 1NO 1 12 ASR A/415V 2NO 2 6 ASR A/415V 3NO 3 4 ASR A/415V 4NO 4 3 ASR A/240V 1NO 1 12 ASR A/415V 2NO 2 6 ASR A/415V 3NO 3 4 ASR A/415V 4NO 4 3 ASR Switch 16A/240V 1NO 1 12 ASV A/240V 2NO 1 12 ASV A/415V 3NO 1 12 ASV A/415V 4NO 1 12 ASV A/240V 1NO 1 12 ASV A/240V 2NO 1 12 ASV A/415V 3NO 1 12 ASV A/415V 4NO 1 12 ASV Changeover switch Switch with signal lamp Changeover witches with zero position 16A/240V 1CO 1 12 WSV A/240V 2CO 1 12 WSV A/240V 1CO 1 12 WSV A/415V 2CO 1 12 WSV A/240V 1NO 1 12 ASV-L A/240V 2NO 1 12 ASV-L A/240V 1NO 1 12 ASV-L A/240V 2NO 1 12 ASV-L A/240V 1CO 1 12 GSV A/240V 2CO 1 12 GSV A/240V 1CO 1 12 GSV A/240V 2CO 1 12 GSV Push-button 16A/240V 1NC 1 12 TV A/240V 1NO 1 12 TV A/240V 1NO 1NC 1 12 TV Push-button with signal lamp 16A/240V 1NO 1 12 TV-L D 2

39 Comfort functions - Energy control D Indication lamp Function Status visualisation. Applications Mainly used to visualise the status of a (sub)part of the installation, heater, motor, fan, pump etc. Nominal Colour Number Packing Designation Ref. No. oprating voltage of modules unit Lampholder 1 12 VL Lamp 12V 12 VZGJ V 12 VZGB V 12 VZGM Lens Transparent 12 VZK Green 12 VZG Orange 12 VZO Red 12 VZR Socket-outlet Standards BS EN C NF C (86) IEC Nominal Nominal Number Packing Designation Ref. No. current voltage of modules unit Edged earth 16A 250V NST Priority relay Standards IEC Number Number Contact- Packing Designation Ref. No. of chanels of modules combination unit 1 2 1NO 1 LR D 3

40 D Comfort functions - Energy control Contactors Standards and approvals IEC BS EN IEC BS EN Approval VDE Function Contactors are electromechanically controlled switches used to control single or multi-phase (high) power loads while the control itself can be (very) low power. Applications Switching of lighting, heating-equipment, motors for pumps and fans,... Nominal Contact Coil AC/DC Number Packing Designation Ref. No. current combination voltage of modules unit Contactor 20A 2NO 12V AC 1 12 VI2020J A 2NO 24V AC 1 12 VI2020B A 2NO 48V AC 1 12 VI2020E A 2NO 230V AC 1 12 VI2020M A 2NO 2NC 24V AC/DC 2 5 VI224BU A 2NO 2NC 230V AC/DC 2 5 VI2224MU A 3NO 24V AC/DC 2 5 VI3024BU A 3NO 230V AC/DC 2 5 VI3024MU A 4NO 24V AC/DC 2 5 VI0424BU A 4NO 230V AC/DC 2 5 VI0424MU A 4NO 24V AC/DC 2 5 VI4024BU A 4NO 230V AC/DC 2 5 VI4024MU A 2NO 230V AC/DC 3 3 VI2040MU A 3NO 24V AC/DC 3 3 VI3040BU A 3NO 230V AC/DC 3 3 VI3040MU A 4NO 24V AC/DC 3 3 VI4040BU A 4NO 230V AC/DC 3 3 VI4040MU A 2NO 24V AC/DC 3 3 VI2040BU A 4NO 24V AC/DC 3 3 VI4063BU A 4NO 230V AC/DC 3 3 VI4063MU A 2NO 230V AC/DC 3 3 VI2063MU Auxiliary contact 6A 1NO 1NC 0,5 1 VI A 2NO 0,5 1 VI Spacer 0,5 12 VIFS Sealing piece 2 12 VIPK VIPK D 4

41 Comfort functions - Energy control D Relays Standards BSEN BSEN VDE VDE VDE 0637 NBN C NF C IEC IEC IEC Function Relays are electromagnetically controlled switches used to control low power loads. Applications Switching of lighting, heating, etc. Galvanic insulation of i. e. status signalisation lamps from a (high) power (high voltage) circuit. Galvanic insulation of PLC-inputs to avoid destruction through excessive voltage. Nominal Contact Coil AC/DC Number Packing Designation Ref. No. current combination voltage of modules unit Relays 16A 1NO 8V AC 1 12 VFR1016A A 1NO 12V AC 1 12 VFR1016J A 1NO 24V AC 1 12 VFR1016B A 1NO 48V AC 1 12 VFR1016E A 1NO 230V AC 1 12 VFR1016M A 1NO 240V AC 1 12 VFR1016P A 1NO 12V DC 1 12 VFR1016JD A 1NO 24V DC 1 12 VFR1016BD A 1NO 1NC 8V AC 1 12 VFR1116A A 1NO 1NC 12V AC 1 12 VFR1116J A 1NO 1NC 24V AC 1 12 VRF1116B A 1NO 1NC 48V AC 1 12 VFR1116E A 1NO 1NC 230V AC 1 12 VFR1116M A 1NO 1NC 240V AC 1 12 VFR1116P A 1NO 1NC 12V DC 1 12 VFR1116JD A 1NO 1NC 24V DC 1 12 VFR1116BD A 2NO 8V AC 1 12 VFR2016A A 2NO 12V AC 1 12 VFR2016J A 2NO 24V AC 1 12 VRF2016B A 2NO 48V AC 1 12 VFR2016E A 2NO 230V AC 1 12 VFR2016M A 2NO 240V AC 1 12 VFR2016P A 2NO 12V DC 1 12 VFR2016JD A 2NO 24V DC 1 12 VFR2016BD A 2NO 2NC 8V AC 2 6 VFR2216A A 2NO 2NC 12V AC 2 6 VFR2216J A 2NO 2NC 24V AC 2 6 VRF2216B A 2NO 2NC 48V AC 2 6 VFR2216E A 2NO 2NC 230V AC 2 6 VFR2216M A 2NO 2NC 240V AC 2 6 VFR2216P A 2NO 2NC 12V DC 2 6 VFR2216JD A 2NO 2NC 24V DC 2 6 VFR2216BD A 4NO 8V AC 2 6 VFR4016A A 4NO 12V AC 2 6 VFR4016J A 4NO 24V AC 2 6 VRF4016B A 4NO 48V AC 2 6 VFR4016E A 4NO 230V AC 2 6 VFR4016M A 4NO 240V AC 2 6 VFR4016P A 4NO 12V DC 2 6 VFR4016JD A 4NO 24V DC 2 6 VFR4016BD D 5

42 D Comfort functions - Energy control Impluls switches Standards IEC IEC BS EN BS EN Function Impulse switches are electromechanically or electronically controlled switches used to control single- or multi-phase medium-power loads while the control itself can be (very) low power. The device switches between 2 stable positions, each time a (brief) impulse energises its control circuit. Applications Mainly used for the switching of lighting and heating equipment and/or to obtain a simplified wiring in case the load needs to be controlled at reduced voltage and/or from more thzn 4 different places. Nominal Contact Coil AC/DC Number Packing Designation Ref. No. current combination voltage of modules unit Electromechanical 16A 1NO 8V AC 1 12 VFS1016A A 1NO 12V AC 1 12 VFS1016J A 1NO 24V AC 1 12 VFS1016B A 1NO 48V AC 1 12 VFS1016E A 1NO 230V AC 1 12 VFS1016M A 1NO 240V AC 1 12 VFS1016P A 1NO 12V DC 1 12 VFS1016JD A 1NO 24V DC 1 12 VFS1016BD V 1NO 1NC 8V AC 1 12 VFS1116A A 1NO 1NC 12V AC 1 12 VFS1116J A 1NO 1NC 24V AC 1 12 VFS1116B A 1NO 1NC 48V AC 1 12 VFS1116E A 1NO 1NC 230V AC 1 12 VFS1116M A 1NO 1NC 240V AC 1 12 VFS1116P A 1NO 1NC 12V DC 1 12 VFS1116JD A 1NO 1NC 24V DC 1 12 VFS1116BD A 2NO 8V AC 1 12 VFS2016A A 2NO 12V AC 1 12 VFS2016J A 2NO 24V AC 1 12 VFS2016B A 2NO 48V AC 1 12 VFS2016E A 2NO 230V AC 1 12 VFS2016M A 2NO 240V AC 1 12 VFS2016P A 2NO 12V DC 1 12 VFS2016JD A 2NO 24V DC 1 12 VFS2016BD A 2NO 2NC 8V AC 2 6 VFS2216A A 2NO 2NC 12V AC 2 6 VFS2216J A 2NO 2NC 24V AC 2 6 VFS2216B A 2NO 2NC 48V AC 2 6 VFS2216E A 2NO 2NC 230V AC 2 6 VFS2216M A 2NO 2NC 240V AC 2 6 VFS2216P A 2NO 2NC 12V DC 2 6 VFS2216JD A 2NO 2NC 24V DC 2 6 VFS2216BD A 4NO 8V AC 2 6 VFS4016A A 4NO 12V AC 2 6 VFS4016J A 4NO 24V AC 2 6 VFS4016B A 4NO 48V AC 2 6 VFS4016E A 4NO 230V AC 2 6 VFS4016M A 4NO 240V AC 2 6 VFS4016P A 4NO 12V DC 2 6 VFS4016JD A 4NO 24V DC 2 6 VFS4016BD Electromechanical Step-by-step / Multi-circuit 16A 1NO 1NO 12V AC 1 12 VSF-S2016J A 1NO 1NO 230V AC 1 12 VSF-S2016M Electronic Central command 10A 1NO 12V AC/DC 1 12 VSF-Z1010JU A 1NO 24V AC/DC 1 12 VSF-Z1010BU A 1NO 230V AC/DC 1 12 VSF-Z1010MU A 1NO 1NC 12V AC/DC 1 12 VSF-Z1110JU A 1NO 1NC 24V AC/DC 1 12 VSF-Z1110BU A 1NO 1NC 230V AC/DC 1 12 VSF-Z1110MU A 2NO 12V AC/DC 1 12 VSF-Z2010JU A 2NO 24V AC/DC 1 12 VSF-Z2010BU A 2NO 230V AC/DC 1 12 VSF-Z2010MU D 6

43 Comfort functions - Energy control D Staircase switches Standards VDE 0632 BS EN Function Push-button operated single-shot timer, switching the power to the load from the moment the push-button has been operated briefly, and switching off again after the presetted time has elapsed. Applications Lighting or ventilation of staircases, basements, halls, etc. Delay Nominal Contact Operating Number Packing Designation Ref. No. curent combination voltage of modules unit Electromechanical 0,5...5 min 16A/250V 1NO 230V 1 12 VTR Electronic 0, min 16A/250V 1NO 230V 1 1 VTR Electronic dim add-on module half intensity s. 16A/250V 1NO 230V 1 1 VTRHL D 7

44 D Comfort functions - Energy control Time relays Standards IEC Function Conditioning of incoming impulses to exact predictable output impulses. Applications From the delayed lighting of driveways (to avoid unnecesary on/off switching), to after-circulation of a pump (to build in some hysteresis, again to avoid continuous on/off switching) to the post-present ventilation of a meeting-room. Switching Contact Operating AC/DC Number Packing Designation Ref. No. capacity combination voltage of modules unit Delay on 10A/250V 1CO V AC/DC 1 1 NVZR-AV Delay off 10A/250V 1CO V AC/DC 1 1 NVZR-RV Positive edge single shot 10A/250V 1CO V AC/DC 1 NCZR-EW Negative edge single shot 10A/250V 1CO V AC/DC 1 NVZR-AW Symmetrical flasher 10A/250V 1CO V AC/DC 1 NVZR-TI D 8

45 Comfort functions - Energy control D Analogue time switches Function Pre-programmed switching of all kinds of electrical devices. Applications Going from the pre-programmed switching of lighting (car park, advertising, signs, plublic roads, etc.) over pre-programmed switching of heating equipment (home and work-environment, waterheating, etc.), to the pre-programmed switching of motors for pumps and fans and even to presence simulation. Program Nr. of Nominal Operating Running Shortest Fix on/off Nr. of Pack. Design. Ref. No. channels current voltage reserve switch time auto modules unit 1 Channel day program 1x24x4 1CO 16A/250V 230V to 50Hz 15 min yes 3 1 GMS x24x4 1CO 16A/250V 230V 300h 15 min yes 3 1 GME week program 7x24x3 1CO 16A/250V 230V to 50Hz 2h yes 3 1 GMS x24x3 1CO 16A/250V 230V 300h 2h yes 3 1 GME Channel day-day program 1x24x2 + 1x24x2 2CO 16A/250V 130VDC/230V 150h 30/30min yes 6 1 GME day-week program 1x24x2 + 7x24x3 2CO 16A/250V 130VDC/230V 150h 30/3h yes 6 1 GME D 9

46 D Comfort functions - Energy control Digital time switches Standards BS EN BS EN VDE 0633 Function Pre-programmed switching of all kinds of electrical devices. Applications Going from the pre-programmed switching of lighting (car park, advertising signs, public roads, etc.) over pre-programmed switching of heating equipment (home and work environment, water heating, etc.), to the pre-programmed switching of motors for pumps and fans and even to random presence simulation. Program Nr. of Switching Operating Running Shortest Nr. of pro- Nr. of Pack. Design. Ref. No. channels capacity voltage reserve switch time gram steps modules unit Day programmable 1x24x60 1xW 16A/250V V 3yr 1min GD Day-week programmable 7X24X60 1xW 16A/250V V 3yr 1min GD X24X60 1xW 16A/250V V 3yr 1s GD X24X60 2xW 16A/250V V 3yr 1s GD X24X3600 2xW 16A/250V V 6yr 1s GD Day-week-year programmable 365x24x3600 2xW 16A/250V V 6yr 1s GDJV D 10

47 Comfort functions - Energy control D Light sensitive switches Standards VDE 0632 VDE0633 BS EN Function Electronic switch controlled by the intensity of the ambient light, detected by a separate or integrated photocell (depending on the model). When the light intensity drops below the threshold setting, the switch changes its state to on position. An increasing ambient light intensity eventually will switch off the device again. Applications Control of lighting in shop windows, offices, car parking areas, controlling street lights, advertising signs, sun blinds, shutters, or even lighting in a home to simulate the presence of people. Program Number of Nominal Operating Number Packing Designation Ref. No. channels current voltage of modules unit DIN rail mounting, separate photocell includes lux 1NO 16A/250V 230V 1 GDS Wall mounting, photocell incorporated lux 1NO 16A/250V 230V 1 GDSW Photocell (spare part) 1 NGDSF D 11

48 D Comfort functions - Energy control Transformers Standards IEC : Safety transformer IEC : Bell transformer Function Reducing the voltage to a very low (safety) voltage used mainly as control-voltage in order to reduce the risk of electrocution due to environmental circumstances (I. e. high degree of humidity like outdoors, in a swimming pool complex, etc.). Applications Going from supplying power to a bell circuit, to supplying power to the control circuit of impulse switches, relays or contactors for the control of lighting, heating, etc. Output Secondary Primary Number Packing Designation Ref. No. power voltage voltage of modules unit Bell transformer 5VA 8/12V V 2 1 KTB VA 8/12V V 2 1 KTB VA 12/24V V 2 1 KTB Safety transformer 25VA 12/24V V 4 1 KTS VA 12/24V V 4 1 KTS VA 12/24V V 6 1 KTS D 12

49 Comfort functions - Energy control D Analogue measurement instruments Standards EN BS EN Function Measurement, visualisation and logging of voltage, current, frequency, hours of operation, power, energy, cos w, etc. Applications Measurement of all possible electrical values from simple measurement as voltage, current, frequency over more complex such as power and energy, to all-in-one measurement with the netanalysing devices. To avoid down-time due to abnormal situations, i. e. power-supply voltage too high, absorbed power too high, etc., leading to malfunctionning and even break-down of the machinery, the measurement and monitoring of the electrical values like voltage, current, power, energy, etc. is an absolute must and even an indespensable asset when it comes to preventive maintenance. Scale Accuracy Number of Number Packing Designation Ref. No. phases of modules unit Volt meter 500V 1, MGAV Ammeter 1, MGAA A 1, MGAA A 1, MGAA Frequency meter Hz 0, MGAF Hour counter 12V MGABZL V MGABZB V/50Hz MGABZM D 13

50 D Comfort functions - Energy control Digital measurement instruments Standards EN BS EN Function Measurement, visualisation and logging of voltage, current, frequency, hours of operation, power, energy, cos w, etc. Applications Measurement of all possible electrical values from simple measurement as voltage, current, frequency over more complex such as power and energy, to all-in-one measurement with the netanalysing devices. To avoid down-time due to abnormal situations, i. e. power-supply voltage too high, absorbed power too high, etc., leading to malfunctionning and even break-down of the machinery, the measurement and monitoring of the electrical values like voltage, current, power, energy, etc. is an absolute must and even an indespensable asset when it comes to preventive maintenance. Scale Accuracy Number of Number Packing Designation Ref. No. voltage phases of modules unit Volt meter 600V 0.5 ± 1 dig MGDV Ammeter 5A 0.5 ± 1 dig MGDA Frequency meter Hz 0.5 ± 1 dig MGDF Watt meter 999.9kW 1, MGDW Energy meter 30A 1, MGDE A 1, MGDE1I A 1, MGDE3I Net analyser 5A MGDN A 1, MGDN D 14

51 Comfort functions - Energy control D Surge arresters Standards NF C IEC Function Protection of an electrical installation and all electrical and electronic devices connected to this installation against destructive overvoltage surges. Such voltage surges can be generated by lightning induced currents, by network-polluting devices such as motors, frequencyconverters, dimmers etc. and by power supplier network switching operations. Applications Surge arresters cover the protection of home appliances (TV, HiFi, VCR, laundry-machine, dishwasher,...), commercial building equipment (computer and data communication network, intrusion and fire system, access-control and building automation system), industrial equipment (PLC, instrumentation, medical apparatus, monitoring devices) and even the protection of entire off-shore drilling platforms. IMAX In Up Up Un Number Auxiliary Nr. of Pack. Design. Ref. No. (L-PE) (L-N) of phases contact modules unit Class 1 Single pole monoblock 35kA 4000V 255V BAE kA 4000V 440V BAE Class 2 Single pole plug-in Plug and base 45kA 10kA 1000V 230V UAE245ES kA 10kA 1000V 230V 1 1CO 1 1 UAE245FM kA 10kA 2100V 400V 1 1CO 1 1 UAE445FM Replacement module (plug only) 45kA 10kA 1000V 230V UAE kA 10kA 2100V 400V UAE Multi pole monoblock 45kA 10kA 1000V 990V 230V 1+N 2 1 UAM kA 10kA 1000V 990V 400V 3+N 1CO 5 1 UAM445FM kA 10kA 1000V 990V 400V 3+N 5 1 UAM Decoupling coil 40A UAED D 15

52 D Notes D 16

53 Residential enclosures E Residential enclosures EUROPE LINE E 2 - E 4 Insulated enclosures Surface mounting Insulated enclosures Flush mounting FIX-O-RAIL JUNIOR E 5 FIX-O-RAIL COVERS E 6 FIX-O-RAIL DESIGN E 7 FIX-O-RAIL CLASSIC E 8 - E 9 FIX-O-RAIL 150 E 10 - E 11 FIX-O-RAIL STANDARD E 12 FIX-O-RAIL 55 E 13 FIX-O-RAIL SENIOR E 14 FIX-O-RAIL ABACO E 15 FIX-O-RAIL 150-F1 E 16 FIX-O-RAIL 150-F4 E 17 Metal enclosures FIX-O-RAIL METAL DESIGN E 18 FIX-O-RAIL METAL STANDARD E 19 FIX-O-RAIL 150 M E 20 Junction boxes FLEX-O-BOX E 22 SERIES 44 E 23 SERIES 55 E 24 E 1

54 E Residential enclosures Surface and flush mounting Europe Line Insulated enclosures IP30 Features Masking frame, base and protective cover made from high resistance material Metal door, powder coated, opens through 180 Cable entry from top, below, from side and from rear side Cable entry plate (top, bottom) removable for easy cable mounting from front side Clamp relief possibility Sealing possible Label for circuit indification Technical data Standards Rated voltage Rated current Degree of protection Protection class DIN and DIN VDE 0603 Part 1 up to 400V/50Hz up to 63A IP30 II (total isolation) Type Dimensions [mm] Flush mounting depth [mm] Dimensions for shell [mm] H x W H x W Dimensions Distribution board flush mounting with door KV UP x x 360 KV UP x x 360 KV UP x x 360 KV UP x x 360 Distribution board hollow walls with door KV HW x x 320 KV HW x x 320 KV HW x x 320 KV HW x x 320 Type Dimensions [mm] Surface depth [mm] H x W Distribution boards surface mounting without door KV AP x ,5 KV AP x ,5 KV AP x ,5 KV AP x ,5 Metal door for surface mounting enclosures T AP x 300 8,5 T AP x 300 8,5 T AP x 300 8,5 T AP x 300 8,5 E 2

55 Residential enclosures Surface and flush mounting E Europe Line Insulated enclosures IP30 Designation Packing Ref. no. unit Flush mounting distribution board with door 1 rows 12 mod KV UP rows 24 mod KV UP rows 36 mod KV UP rows 48 mod KV UP Hollow wall mounting distribution board with door 1 rows 12 mod KV HW rows 24 mod KV HW rows 36 mod KV HW rows 48 mod KV HW Surface mounting distribution board without door 1 rows 12 mod KV AP rows 24 mod KV AP rows 36 mod KV AP rows 48 mod KV AP Accessories Transparent door for surface mounting distribution bords 1 row AAZTS12A rows AAZTS24A rows AAZTS36A rows AAZTS48A Metal door 1 row AT AP rows AT AP rows AT AP rows AT AP Transparent door for flush mounting distribution bords 1 row AAZTS12U rows AAZTS24U rows AAZTS36U rows AAZTS48U Mounting plate 1 row AAZM rows AAZM rows AAZM rows AAZM E 3

56 E Residential enclosures Surface and flush mounting Accessories Designation Packing Ref. no. unit Door security lock PE / N bar without support Support Partition vertical Partition horizontal FI-Clamps Control connector clamp Mounting rail with reduced hight Blind cover Label for circuit indification Clamps for neutral conductor flush mounting, different keys AAZTU surface mounting, different keys AAZTA flush mounting, same keys AAZTU surface mounting, same keys AAZTA pole AAZK pole AAZK pole AAZK PE terminal AAZPN PE / N terminal AAZP PE / N terminal AAZN N terminal AAZPN row AAZA rows AAZA rows AAZA rows AAZA AAZA AAZN AXSK increase mounting depth by 20 mm AAZG for mounting slots lockable AGBS AGBS , 2 rows AAZP , 4 rows AAZP LK/N LK/N LK/N Clamps for protective conductor SKU 16/ SKU 35/ SKU 70/ Connection clamp Rail Filling piece Spring End clamp with fork AKG with pin AKS mm long PS ,75 mm to disperse the heat for DIN-rail EN 50022/05.78 FST Support for device cover FDT for DIN-rail EN 50022/05.78 EKL E 4

57 Residential enclosures Surface mounting E FIX-O-RAIL JUNIOR Insulated enclosures IP54 Applications For new buildings, replacing old units and adding extensions. Features High degree of protection: IP54 In accordance with EN Total insulation Available in two versions: 4 and 8 modules Colour: RAL 7035 Surface mounting With CEBEC approval mark Packing unit Ref. no. Enclosures With earth and neutral terminals Fix-o-Rail Junior - 4 modules x 90 x E & N: 2 (5 x 16 mm 2 ) 1/ Fix-o-Rail Junior - 8 modules x 170 x E & N: 6 x 10 mm x 16 mm 2 1/ Without earth and neutral terminals Fix-o-Rail Junior - 4 modules x 90 x Fix-o-Rail Junior - 8 modules x 170 x Accessories Earth and neutral terminals For Junior 4 modules For Junior 8 modules - E: 6 x 10 mm x 16 mm 2 - green For Junior 8 modules - N: 6 x 10 mm x 16 mm 2 - blue Grommets PG PG PG Sealing bracket Blank plate 4 modules - can be cutted into 9 mm lengths E 5

58 E Residential enclosures Surface mounting FIX-O-RAIL COVERS IP30 Features Made from high resistance material Degree of protection: IP30 Colour: RAL 7035 Surface mounting With DIN-rail Packing unit Ref. no. Enclosures Fix-o-Rail Cover - 2 modules x 51 x 61 1/ Fix-o-Rail Cover - 4 modules x 88 x 61 1/ Fix-o-Rail Cover - 6 modules x 165 x Fix-o-Rail Cover - 8 modules x 200 x 72 1/ E 6

59 Residential enclosures Surface mounting E FIX-O-RAIL DESIGN Insulated enclosures IP40 Applications Fix-o-Rail Design is a modern enclosure, with an attractive styling, for new buildings, replacing old units or adding extensions. Features Made from high impact resistance material Low side walls, allow easy access to apparatus Degree of protection: IP40 Colours: base RAL 7036 cover RAL , 14 and 18 modules Standard: in accordance with EN Comprehensive cable entry facilities at top, bottom, sides and rear Surface mounting Packing unit Ref. no. Enclosures With earth and neutral terminals Fix-o-Rail Design - 10 modules x 218 x E & N: 2 (10 x 16 mm 2 ) 1/ Fix-o-Rail Design - 14 modules x 292 x E & N: 2 (14 x 16 mm 2 ) 1/ Fix-o-Rail Design - 18 modules x 370 x E & N: 2 (18 x 16 mm 2 ) 1/ Without earth and neutral terminals Fix-o-Rail Design - 10 modules x 218 x 108 1/ Fix-o-Rail Design - 14 modules x 292 x 108 1/ Fix-o-Rail Design - 18 modules x 370 x 108 1/ Accessories Insulated supports with earth and neutral terminals N: 2 (5 x 16 mm 2 ) - E: 10 x 16 mm 2 1/ N: 2 (8 x 16 mm 2 ) - E: 14 x 16 mm 2 1/ N: 2 (10 x 16 mm 2 ) - E: 16 x 16 mm 2 1/ Insulated supports (for earth and neutral terminals) For / For / For / Earth or neutral terminals 5 x 16 mm x 16 mm x 16 mm x 16 mm x 16 mm E 7

60 E Residential enclosures Surface mounting FIX-O-RAIL CLASSIC Insulated enclosures IP30/IP40 Applications Fix-o-Rail Classic and the accessories are a homogeneous system for power distribution purposes in the house building, new homes, adding extensions and replacing old units. Features Degree of protection: IP30/IP40 with door Total insulation (with backplate and door) Transparent or white door Adjustable DIN-rail Colour: RAL , 26, 39 and 52 modules In accordance with EN Surface mounting With KEMA approval Classic A The Fix-o-Rail Classic A packaging includes: A mounting frame A protective cover A backplate A support with earth and neutral terminals A modular blank plate Four insulating caps Labels for circuit identification Installation guidelines Classic B The Fix-o-Rail Classic B packaging includes: A mounting frame A protective cover Labels for circuit identification Installation guidelines Packing unit Ref. no. Enclosures Classic A - with earth and neutral terminals Fix-o-Rail Classic - 13 modules x 250 x 94 - E: 8 x 16 mm 2 - N: 10 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail Classic - 26 modules x 250 x 94 - E: 18 x 16 mm 2 - N: 2 (8 x 16 mm 2 ) Fix-o-Rail Classic - 39 modules x 250 x 94 - E: 27 x 16 mm 2 - N: 2 (8 x 16 mm 2 ) Fix-o-Rail Classic - 52 modules x 250 x 94 - E: 27 x 16 mm 2 - N: 2 (8 x 16 mm 2 ) Classic B - without earth and neutral terminals Fix-o-Rail Classic - 13 modules x 250 x Fix-o-Rail Classic - 26 modules x 250 x Fix-o-Rail Classic - 39 modules x 250 x Fix-o-Rail Classic - 52 modules x 250 x E 8

61 Residential enclosures Surface mounting E FIX-O-RAIL CLASSIC Insulated enclosures IP30/IP40 Packing unit Ref. no. Accessories for Classic B Insulated backplate + screws One row - 13 modules Two rows - 26 modules Three rows - 39 modules Equipped insulated support N: 10 x 16 mm 2 - E: 8 x 16 mm N: 2 (8 x 16 mm 2 ) - E: 18 x 16 mm N: 2 (8 x 16 mm 2 ) - E:27 x 16 mm Common accessories Transparent door + hinges One row - 13 modules Two rows - 26 modules Three rows - 39 modules Four rows - 52 modules Plain door + hinges - colour RAL 9010 One row - 13 modules Two rows - 26 modules Three rows - 39 modules Four rows - 52 modules Insulated support for earth and neutral terminals Equipped insulated support 3P+N + earth assembly Earth or neutral terminals 8 x 16 mm x 16 mm x 16 mm x 16 mm x 16 mm Link for neutral or earth terminal Shrouding for earth and neutral support Metal support for connection terminals Connection terminals Phase terminal 6 x 10 mm x 16 mm Earth terminal 6 x 10 mm x 16 mm Neutral terminal 6 x 10 mm x 16 mm Cable connector clamps Axial 25 mm 2 insulated pin type Axial 35 mm 2 insulated pin type 1/ Cable entry Blank plate 4 modules Coupling Sealing bracket E 9

62 E Residential enclosures Surface mounting FIX-O-RAIL 150 Insulated enclosures IP40 Applications Fix-o-Rail 150 is the best choice for power distribution purposes in: the house building industry. For applications in new homes, for replacing old units or adding extensions. hotels, restaurants, offices, wherever a touch of elegance is required of what was previously a purely functional part of the building installation. The Fix-o-Rail 150 enclosure is designed to meet these needs. Features Total insulation High degree of protection IP40 High impact resistance material. In accordance with EN Centre distance of 150 mm between DIN-rails and 30 mm clearance behind the mounting frame, which allow plenty of room for access when wiring both around and behind the DIN-rails. Each DIN-rail can accomodate as much as 18 modular units of 18 mm width. Fix-o-Rail 150 has an undeep base for accessibility and easier wiring. The removable mounting frame allows the contractor to save both time and money. The multi-service enclosure Fix-o-Rail 150, designed for surface mounting, is suitable for all DIN-rail modular equipment. Colour: grey RAL 7035 Components 1 Undeep base 2 Earth bar 3 Removable mounting frame 4 Protective cover 5 Transparent door 6 Entry plate 7 Insulating cap 8 Fastener 9 Hinge 10 Quarter-turn screw E 10

63 Residential enclosures Surface mounting E FIX-O-RAIL 150 Insulated enclosures IP40 Packing unit Ref. no. Enclosures with earth and neutral terminals With transparent door Fix-o-Rail modules x 355 x E: 14 x 16 mm 2 - N: 18 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail modules x 355 x E: 14 x 16 mm 2 - N: 18 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail modules x 355 x E: 1 (18 x 16 mm 2 ) - N: 2 (18 x 16 mm 2 ) Fix-o-Rail modules x 355 x E: 1 (18 x 16 mm 2 ) - N: 2 (18 x 16 mm 2 ) With plain grey door Fix-o-Rail modules x 355 x E: 14 x 16 mm 2 - N: 18 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail modules x 355 x E: 14 x 16 mm 2 - N: 18 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail modules x 355 x E: 1 (18 x 16 mm 2 ) - N: 2 (18 x 16 mm 2 ) Fix-o-Rail modules x 355 x E: 1 (18 x 16 mm 2 ) - N: 2 (18 x 16 mm 2 ) Accessories Support with earth and neutral terminals E: 18 x 16 mm 2 - N: 2 (10 x 16 mm 2 ) E: 14 x 16 mm 2 - N: 2 (10 x 16 mm 2 ) E: 38 x 16 mm 2 - N: 2 (14 x 16 mm 2 ) - 10 x 16 mm Phase bar with cable capacity of 8 x 16 mm Neutral bar with cable capacity of 8 x 16 mm Earth bar 8 x 16 mm x 16 mm x 16 mm Insulated support for earth and neutral terminals Earth or neutral terminals 38 x 16 mm x 16 mm x 16 mm x 16 mm x 16 mm x 16 mm x 16 mm x 16 mm pole terminals 63A A Protective shroud for 160A terminals Universal entry plates With moulded-in marks for conduits For mounting at the bottom or at the top of the enclosure Safety lock with two keys Drawing pocket Blank plate 4 modules Coupling - 2 x PG Distribution cap E 11

64 E Residential enclosures Surface mounting FIX-O-RAIL STANDARD Insulated enclosures IP41 Applications The Fix-o-Rail Standard enclosures are used for power distribution throughout the building industry. The Fix-o-Rail Standard is a universal type suitable for surface and flush mounting, made from high impact resistance material. Features In accordance with EN With CEBEC approval mark Degree of protection IP41 Colour: grey RAL 7035 Base has double wall construction to avoid any distorsion during installation Removable mounting frame The centre distance between two rails is 125 mm For all DIN-rail equipment up to 92.5 mm height Each rail can accomodate up to 14 modules of 18 mm width Total insulation Packing unit Ref. no. Enclosures Accessories With earth and neutral terminals Fix-o-Rail Standard - 14 modules x 300 x E&N: 6 x 10 mm x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail Standard - 28 modules x 300 x E: 6 x 10 mm x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail Standard - 28 modules x 300 x N: 2 (6 x 10 mm x 16 mm 2 ) Fix-o-Rail Standard - 42 modules x 300 x E: 2 (6 x 10 mm x 16 mm 2 ) Fix-o-Rail Standard - 28 modules x 300 x N: 3 (6 x 10 mm x 16 mm 2 ) Phase bar (black) Neutral bar (blue) Earth bar (green) Universal cable entry Blank plate - 4 modules - can be cutted into 9 mm lengths Masking frames and doors For standard 14 modules For standard 28 modules For standard 42 modules Security lock + two keys E 12

65 Residential enclosures Surface mounting E FIX-O-RAIL 55 Insulated enclosures IP55 Applications The Fix-o-Rail 55 enclosures are designed for power distribution in environments requiring a high degree of protection. Features Total insulation Can be coupled Transparent door Adjustable DIN-rail depth for equipment up to 92.5 mm Padlocking possible Door coupling at the left or right side In accordance with EN With the CEBEC approval mark Packing unit Ref. no. Enclosures Accessories With earth terminal Fix-o-Rail 55-3 modules x 83 x Fix -o Rail 55-5 modules x 125 x Fix-o-Rail 55-8 modules x 215 x Fix-o-Rail modules x 285 x E: 2 x 16 mm x 10 mm Fix-o-Rail modules x 285 x E: 2 x 16 mm x 10 mm Fix-o-Rail modules x 285 x E: 2 x 16 mm x 10 mm Terminal - cable capacity 2 x 16 mm x 6 mm Coupling set to couple two boxes Locking device E 13

66 E Residential enclosures Surface mounting FIX-O-RAIL SENIOR Insulated enclosures IP41 Applications As an elegant insulated loadcentre in: restaurants and hotels workshops hospitals shop centers offices Features The Fix-o-Rail Senior enclosures have a double wall. Construction: steel outer wall plus inner insulated extruded wall to maintain the double insulation DIN-rail distance: mm Cover plate with quarter-turn screws Removable mounting frame Packing Ref. no. Ref. no. unit Enclosures Accessories With plain grey or transparent door Grey door Transparent door Fix-o-Rail Senior - 48 modules x 300 x Fix-o-Rail Senior - 60 modules x 300 x Fix-o-Rail Senior - 96 modules x 550 x Fix-o-Rail Senior modules x 550 x Fix-o-Rail Senior modules x 550 x pole terminals 63A A Protective shroud for 160A terminal Earth/neutral bars For enclosure 300 mm width For enclosure 550 mm width Cylindrical lock with key no. 2432E Adaptor set for cylindrical lock Cable-entry plates Plain plate Predrilled plate 17 x PG Predrilled plate 1 x PG x PG x PG x PG E 14

67 Residential enclosures Flush mounting E FIX-O-RAIL ABACO Insulated enclosures IP40 Applications Fix-o-Rail Abaco enclosures find their place in the power distribution into the house building industry: new homes, apartments, offices, hotels. Due to the design of the masking frame and the door, the Abaco flush mounting enclosure offers significant aesthetic appeal, particularly in applications where appearance is important. Features Flush mounting Total insulation Degree of protection IP40 CE-marking High impact resistance material Removable mounting frame Transparent door made from polycarbonate 20 mm clearance behind the mounting frame Colours: Grey: RAL 7035 (4, 7, 10, 12, 26 and 39 modules) White: RAL 9010 (4, 7, 10 and 14 modules) Metallised black: (4, 7, 10 and 14 modules) Packing unit Ref. no. Enclosures without E/N terminals Accessories Grey enclosure with transparent cover Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 2/4 modules - 1 row x 120 x 95 1/ Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 4/7 modules - 1 row x 175 x 95 1/ Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 6/10 modules - 1 row x 230 x 95 1/ Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 10/14 modules - 1 row x 300 x 95 1/ Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 26 modules - 2 row x 315 x Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 39 modules - 3 row x 315 x White enclosure with transparent cover Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 2/4 modules - 1 row x 120 x 95 1/ Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 4/7 modules - 1 row x 175 x 95 1/ Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 6/10 modules - 1 row x 230 x 95 1/ Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 10/14 modules - 1 row x 300 x 95 1/ Black enclosure with transparent cover Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 2/4 modules - 1 row x 120 x 95 1/ Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 4/7 modules - 1 row x 175 x 95 1/ Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 6/10 modules - 1 row x 230 x 95 1/ Fix-o-Rail Abaco - 10/14 modules - 1 row x 300 x 95 1/ Insulated support with earth and neutral terminals E/N: 5 x 10 mm 2 - for 2/4 modules enclosure E/N: 7 x 10 mm 2 - for 4/7 modules enclosure E/N: 2 x 10 mm x 10 mm 2 - for 6/10 modules enclosure E/N: 2 x 16 mm x 10 mm 2 - for 10/14 modules enclosure E/N: 2 (2 x 16 mm 2 12 x 10 mm 2 )- for 26 and 39 modules enclosure Coupling Blank plates Grey - width = 45 mm White - width = 45 mm Black - width = 45 mm Transparent lids For 2/4 modules enclosure For 4/7 modules enclosure For 6/10 modules enclosure For 10/14 modules enclosure For 26 modules enclosure For 39 modules enclosure E 15

68 E Residential enclosures Flush mounting FIX-O-RAIL 150-F1 Insulated enclosures IP Applications Fix-o-Rail 150-F1 is the best choice for power distribution purpose in: the house building industry. For applications in new homes, for replacing old units or adding extensions hotel, restaurants, offices, wherever a touch of elegance is required of what was previously a purely functional part of the building installation. Due to the design of the masking frame and door, the Fix-o-Rail 150-F1 flush mounting enclosure offers significant aesthetic appeal, particularly in applications where appearance is important. Features Total insulation High degree of protection IP40 High impact resistance material In accordance with EN CEBEC approved CE-label Centre distance of 150 mm between DIN-rails and 20 mm clearance behind the mounting frame Each DIN-rail can accomodate as much as 14 modular units of 18 mm width The removable mounting frame allows the contractor to save both time and money With transparent door One enclosure can be installed in either: brickwork hollow walls Components 1. Base 2. Support with terminals 3. Removable mounting frame 4. Protective cover 5. Masking frame and door 6. Removable entries 7. Positioning lugs 8. Label and label holders 9. Receptacle for storing the single line diagram Packing unit Ref. no. Enclosures Accessories With earth and neutral bar Fix-o-Rail 150-F1-14 mod. - 1 row x 423 x E&N: 14 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail 150-F1-28 mod. - 2 rows x 423 x E&N: 17 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail 150-F1-42 mod. - 3 rows x 423 x E&N: 2 (14 x 16 mm 2 ) Fix-o-Rail 150-F1-56 mod. - 4 rows x 423 x E&N: 2 (14 x 16 mm 2 ) Labels and label holders Blank plate Adhesive pictograms Security lock with two keys Grips for building into hollow walls E 16

69 Residential enclosures Flush mounting E FIX-O-RAIL 150-F4 Insulated enclosures IP40 ➀ Base ➁ Support with terminals ➂ Removable mounting frame ➃ Protective cover ➄ Masking frame and door ➅ Removable entries ➆ Positioning lugs ➇ Labels and label holders ➈ Receptacle for storing the single line diagram ➉ Door catch Applications The Fix-o-Rail 150-F4 is an electrical distribution board for the following applications: homes: new buildings, rennovations and extensions commercial buildings: offices, shops, etc. Due to the discreet design and colour of the masking frame and door, the Fix-o-Rail 150-F4 flush mounting enclosure offers signifiant aesthetic appeal, particularly in applications where appearance is important. Features Base, protective cover and removable cable entries are made in high resistant material Incandescent wire test: base and entries 850 C protective cover 650 C terminal supports 960 C Each DIN-rail can accomodate as much as 14 modular units of 18 mm width Either with plain or transparent door One enclosure can be installed in either: brickwork half-inset mounting hollow walls The door and the masking frame are in sheet steel coated with a white epoxy powder (colour RAL 9010) In accordance with EN CEBEC and VDE 0603 Teil 1 approved. Degree of protection: IP40-5 Total insulation CE-label Earth and neutral bar: 14 modules: 14 x 16 mm 2 28 modules: 17 x 16 mm 2 42 modules: 2 (14 x 16 mm 2 ) 56 modules: 2 (14 x 16 mm 2 ) Packing Ref. no. Ref. no. unit Enclosures Accessories White plain door - With earth and neutral bar Transparent door Plain door Fix-o-Rail 150-F4-14 modules - 1 row x 375 x Fix-o-Rail 150-F4-28 modules - 2 row x 375 x Fix-o-Rail 150-F4-42 modules - 3 row x 375 x Fix-o-Rail 150-F4-56 modules - 4 row x 375 x Half-inset frames For 1 row enclosure For 2 rows enclosure For 3 rows enclosure For 4 rows enclosure Labels and labelholders Blank plates Adhesive pictograms Security lock with two keys Grips for building into hollow walls E 17

70 E Residential enclosures Surface mounting FIX-O-RAIL METAL DESIGN Metal enclosures Features For surface mounting Suitable for DIN-rail mounting devices up to 70 mm as MCB s, RCCB s, relays, switches, timers, contactors, etc. Manufactured from panel flat quality mild steel, cold reduced CR4 from 1.0 mm Pre-treated prior to powder coating, fully immersed in iron phosphate solution Electrostatic powder coating on a continuous line base colour RAL 7035 Slotted fixing holes on the base permit all leveling adjustment Earth and neutral fitted to the base, each terminal being able to accept a 16 mm 2 stranded round conductor With DIN-rails Packing unit Ref. no. Enclosures With transparent door - With earth and neutral terminal Fix-o-Rail Metal Design - 10 modules x 220 x E & N: 8 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail Metal Design - 14 modules x 292 x E & N: 12 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail Metal Design - 18 modules x 370 x E & N: 16 x 16 mm FIX-O-RAIL 150 M Metal enclosures Features For maximum flexibility in use 1 row 18 modules 2 row 36 modules 3 row 54 modules 4 row 72 modules For surface mounting Earth and neutral terminals standard Distance between two DIN-rails: 150 mm Generous wiring room For DIN-rail equipment up to 70 mm high With plain grey or transparent door Colour: grey RAL 7035 Packing Ref. no. Ref. no. unit Enclosures with earth and neutral terminals With trans- parent door With plain grey door Fix-o-Rail 150 M - 18 modules x 430 x E & N: 16 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail 150 M - 36 modules x 430 x E & N: 2 (16 x 16 mm 2 ) Fix-o-Rail 150 M - 54 modules x 430 x 110- E & N: 3 (16 x 16 mm 2 ) Fix-o-Rail 150 M - 72 modules x 430 x 110- E & N: 4 (16 x 16 mm 2 ) E 18

71 Residential enclosures Surface mounting E FIX-O-RAIL METAL STANDARD Metal enclosures Features For surface mounting Suitable for DIN-rail mounting devices up to 70 mm as MCB s, RCCB s, relays, switches, timers, contactors, etc. Manufactured from panel flat quality mild steel, cold reduced CR4 from 1.0 mm Pre-treated prior to powder coating, fully immersed in iron phosphate solution Electrostatic powder coating on a continuous line base colour RAL 7035 Slotted fixing holes on the base permit all leveling adjustment Earth and neutral fitted to the base, each terminal being able to accept a 16 mm 2 stranded round conductor With DIN-rails Packing unit Ref. no. Enclosures Without door - With earth terminal Fix-o-Rail Metal Standard - 4 modules x 112 x 85 - E: 3 x 16 mm With plain grey door - With earth and neutral terminals Fix-o-Rail Metal Standard - 4 modules x 112 x E: 3 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail Metal Standard - 8 modules x 112 x E & N: 8 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail Metal Standard - 12 modules x 322 x E & N: 12 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail Metal Standard - 24 modules x 322 x 110 E: 16 x 16 mm 2 - N: 2 (16 x 16 mm 2 ) With transparent door - With earth and neutral terminals Fix-o-Rail Metal Standard - 12 modules x 322 x E & N: 12 x 16 mm Fix-o-Rail Metal Standard - 24 modules x 322 x 110 E: 16 x 16 mm 2 - N: 2 (16 x 16 mm 2 ) E 19

72 E Residential enclosures Distribution boards Surface mounting MODULAR 200 Type B, 3P+N MCB distribution board Features In accordance with BS 5486 Part 12 and BS EN Modular design concept enables flexible selection of incomers, extension boxes etc. Manufactured in quality mild steel, cold reduced CR4 Pre-treated prior to electrostatic powder coating in RAL dark-grey Structured paint finish gives pleasing appearance with lasting durability 200A continuously rated copper busbar 16 ka short-circuit capacity Fully shrouded phase busbars for increased safety One piece (no welds or rivets) phase busbars to eliminate the risk of hot spots Accepts 6 ka, 10 ka and 15 ka MCB s Pan assembly can be quickly removed to ease installation Ample space behind pan assembly aids wiring installation Comprehensive range of incomers up to 200A all with positive contact indication Modular extension boxes can be added to install modular control devices etc. 25 mm 2 terminal cable capacity on earth and neutral bars Split earth and neutral bars reduces wiring installation time Clean earth facility available on request Shrouded neutral terminal bars for increased safety Quick neutral disconnect facility as standard to aid speedy testing Reversible doors (left or right mounting) to suit installation requirements Doors can be removed to reduce installation time Unique hinges allow doors to be opened to 110 within board frame size, permitting boards to be fitted directly adjacent Doors an be fitted with looks for increased security Large capacity document holder on door for circuit schedules/schematics Doors on all units with bonding conductors. E 20

73 Residential enclosures Distribution boards Surface mounting E MODULAR 200 Type B, 3P+N MCB distribution board Packing unit Ref. no. Distribution boards Incomer kits Type B distribution boards Four 3P ways 200A x 135 x Six 3P ways 200A x 135 x Eight 3P ways 200A x 135 x Twelve 3P ways 200A x 135 x Eighteen 3P ways 200A x 135 x Suitable for internal fitting in all type B MCB distribution boards 100A isolator, 3P switch disconnector A - 30 ma RCD switch A - 100mA RCD switch A - 100mA RCD switch (time delayed) A - 300mA RCD switch A isolator, 3P switch disconnector A direct connection, 3P switch disconnection kit A single phase conversion kit Extension modules 200A incomer extension modules 200A 4P switch disconnector 250 x 135 x A 3P MCCB (non automatic) 500 x 135 x A 3P MCCB (automatic) 500 x 135 x A 4P switch disconnector 500 x 135 x Equipment extension modules Modular device extension box 250 x 135 x Spreader box 250 x 135 x P MCB PAN assemblies (type B) with busbar 200A Terminal bars Four 3P ways - 200A Six 3P ways - 200A Eight 3P ways - 200A Twelve 3P ways - 200A Eighteen 3P ways - 200A Four 3P ways - 200A - earth Four 3P ways - 200A - neutral Six 3P ways - 200A - earth Six 3P ways - 200A - neutral Eight 3P ways - 200A - earth Eight 3P ways - 200A - neutral Twelve 3P ways - 200A - earth Twelve 3P ways - 200A - neutral Eighteen 3P ways - 200A - earth Eighteen 3P ways - 200A - neutral E 21

74 E Residential Junction boxes enclosures FLEX-O-BOX Junction boxes 2,5 mm 2-6 mm 2 IP65 Features Suitable for surface mounting 6 mm 2-500V IP65 protection degree Standards and approvals: CEBEC: NBN C NBN C VDE: 0606 Teil 1 IMQ: CEI KEMA: IEC 670 Colour: RAL 7035 Material: resists the 750 C incandescent wire test Halogen-free Flexible entries 7 x PG16 in the side wall 2 x 20 mm max. diameter entries in the back of the base Suitable for 20 mm max. diameter cable Suitable for 5/8 and 3/4 tubes Suitable for cable seals (8 mm min. thread length) Packing unit Ref. no. Junction box Accessories Flex-o-Box - IP65-2,5 mm 2 - colour RAL / Flex-o-Box - IP65-6 mm 2 - colour RAL x / Pin-type 5 terminal block 6 mm 2-500V Hole-type 5 terminal strip 6 mm 2-500V Cable seals PG16, grey Entry socket PG16 for 5/8 inch tube, grey 25/ Entry socket PG16 for 3/4 inch tube, grey 25/ Insulation cap PG16, grey Stainless steel cover fastening screws E 22

75 Residential Junction boxes enclosures E SERIES 44 Junction boxes 2.5 mm 2-4 mm 2 Packing Ref. no. unit Capacity: 4 mm 2 Junction box IP44-4 mm 2-4 cable glands - 65 x 35 - colour: grey RAL Junction box IP44-4 mm 2-4 cable glands - 80 x 40 - colour: grey RAL Capacity: 4 mm 2 Junction box IP44-6 cable glands - 80 x 80 x 40 - colour: grey RAL E 23

76 E Residential Junction boxes enclosures SERIES 55 Multipurpose junction boxes IP66/IP67 Applications As an empty box As a junction box (10/16/25 mm 2 ) Can be coupled Other features Standard: IEC 529 Approval: CEBEC Material: thermoplastic high impact polyphenylene oxyde Surface mounting High degree of protection IP66 / IP67 Packing unit Ref. no. Junction boxes Empty boxes with grey cover For 10 mm x 125 x 75 1/ For 16 mm x 175 x 95 1/ For 25 mm x 175 x 95 1/ Empty boxes with transparent cover For 16 mm x 175 x 95 1/ For 25 mm x 175 x 95 1/ Equipped boxes with grey cover Terminal capacity: 5 x 4 mm 2-4 x 6 mm 2-3 x 10 mm x 125 x 75 1/ Terminal capacity: 5 x 6 mm 2-4 x 4 mm 2-3 x 16 mm x 175 x 95 1/ Clamp capacity: 4 x 16 mm 2-3 x 25 mm 2-2 x 35 mm x 175 x 95 1/ Accessories Terminal blocks 500V 10 mm 2-5 clamps - cap. 5 x 4 / 4 x 6 / 3 x 10 mm 2 1/ mm 2-5 clamps - cap. 5 x 6 / 4 x 10 / 3 x 16 mm 2 1/ mm 2-1 clamp / 1 nut 1/ mm 2-1 clamp / 1 nut - cap. 4 x 16 / 3 x 25 / 2 x 35 mm 2 1/ mm 2-1 clamp / 1 nut + 1 check nut 1/ Couplings, to couple two or more boxes Mounting plates For box 16 mm For box 25 mm Insulated cap E 24

77 Contactors F AC contactors Contactor-combinations Auxiliary contactors Heavy current contactors Mini-contactors F 2 Compact-contactors F 3 - F 6 LS...K-contactors F 7 - F 13 LS...-contactors F 14 - F 18 Small insulated enclosures F 20 Reversing contactors F 21 - F 22 Star-delta-starter F 23 Safety relays F 24 Mini-, Compact-, SH...-relays F 25 Coupling relays (Interface), integr. suppression element F 26 - F 27 Accessories F 28 - F 32 Bar contactors, double bar contactors F 33 Soft starters Static soft starters F 34 F 1

78 F Contactors AC contactors Mini-contactors AC operation DC operation 230V 50Hz 24V DC Power rating [kw], AC-3, 3~ Designation Packing E-No. E-No. 230V 400V 500V 690V units 3-pole at 24V DC: 1.2W Screw terminal LS LS Screw terminal, Coil with integrated diode LS LS , ,50 Flat plug terminal 1 x 6.3mm LS , LS , , ,60 Solder pin terminal 1 x 0.8mm (for soldering to PCB's) LS , LS , , ,60 4-pole at 24V DC : LS W LS W Screw terminal LS , LS , , ,40 Flat plug terminal 1 x 6.3mm LS , ,60 Solder pin terminal 1 x 0.8mm (for soldering to PCB's) LS , ,60 E-No. voltage suffix XX0 for contactors Type LS 07 (coil not replaceable) AC-operation suffix -8C F H -8K Hz [V] Hz [V] AC-operation suffix -7G A B -7C -7D -79-7E F m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m 0.75 U S -coil 50 Hz [V] Hz [V] AC-operation suffix C -68-5D E -59 Double frequency coil 50/60 Hz [V] DC-operation suffix -1A -1B -00-1C -1D -1E F -18-1G -14 (Maximum coil voltage m m m m m m m only DC 180V) DC [V] Remark: Use suffix only with E-No. of the basic execution, e.g. suffix for DC only with contactors with DC-coil on the lable of the contactors, you will find the suffix according to above table, e.g. 24 V, 50 Hz = suffix -85. On invoices / order confirmations etc. from our system, the suffix has 3 digits, end digit = 0, e.g. suffix is Ordering example: Contactor type LS with e.g. standard coil 24V 50Hz E-No , e.g. with standard coil DC 48V E-No Price increase: For contactors from table with designation»m«a price increase has to be considered. F 2

79 Contactors AC contactors F Compact contactors AC operation DC operation 230V 50Hz 24V DC Power rating [kw], AC-3, 3~ Designation Packing E-No. E-No. 230V 400V 500V 690V units. 3-pole up to 6 auxiliary contacts can be added Screw terminal LS 02K.10 20/ , LS 02K.01 20/ , LS / , LS / ,20 Flat plug terminal 2 x 2.8mm (1 x 6.3/2 x 2.8mm, AC 1: 20A, on request) LS 02K.10 20/ , LS 02K.01 20/ , LS / , LS / ,60 Solder pin terminal 1 x 1mm (for soldering to PCB's) LS 02K.10 20/ , LS 02K.01 20/ , LS / , LS / , , , , , , , , , , , , ,70 Interface contactors 3-pole use no extra auxiliary blocks, only 24V DC / 1.2 W Screw terminal LS 02K LS 02K LS LS Solder pin terminal 1 x 1mm (for soldering to PCB's) LS 02K LS 02K LS LS , , , , , , , ,70 Interface contactors 3-pole additional 2 auxiliary contacts max. 24V DC / 2W Screw terminal LS 02K LS 02K LS LS , , , ,10 Solder pin terminal 1 x 1mm (for soldering to PCB's) LS 02K LS 02K LS LS , , , ,70 F 3

80 F Contactors AC contactors Compact contactors AC operation DC operation 230V 50Hz 24V DC Power rating [kw], AC-3, 3~ Designation Packing E-No. E-No. 230V 400V 500V 690V units. 4-pole up to 6 auxiliary contacts can be added Screw terminal LS 02K / , LS 02K / , LS 02K / , , , LS / , LS / , LS / ,20 Flat plug terminal 2 x 2.8mm (1 x 6.3/2 x 2.8 on request) LS 02K / , , , , LS / , ,70 Solder pin terminal 1 x 1mm LS 02K / , LS 02K / , LS 02K / , , , LS / , LS / , LS / , , ,70 E-No. voltage suffix XX0 for contactors Type LS 02K and LS 05 AC-operation suffix -8C E K P Hz [V] Hz [V] AC-operation suffix C -68-5D Double frequency coil 50/60 Hz [V] DC-operation suffix -1A -1B -00-1C -1D -1E F -18-1G J -20 (Maximum coil voltage m m m m m m m m m only 250V/DC) DC [V] Remark: Use suffix only with E-No. of the basic execution, e.g. suffix for DC only with contactors with DC-coil on the lable of the contactors, you will find the suffix according to above table, e.g. 24 V, 50 Hz = suffix -85. On invoices / order confirmations etc. from our system, the suffix has 3 digits, end digit = 0, e.g. suffix is Ordering example: Contactor type LS with e.g. standard coil 24V 50Hz E-No , e.g. standard coil DC 48V E-Nr For contactors from table with designation»m«a price increase has to be considered. F 4

81 Contactors AC contactors F Accessories for compact contactors Description for contactors DIN Designation Packing E-No. Type LS 02K, LS 05 EN... units Auxiliary contact block DIN EN for front snap-on mounting Screw terminal, frame IV S Design no. 10E 11E HS 05K ,45 Design no. 10E 21E HS 05K ,00 Design no. 10E 12E HS 05K ,00 Design no. 10E 22E HS 05K ,80 Design no. 10E 23E HS 05K ,60 Design no. 10E 32E HS 05K ,60 Design no. 10E 41E HS 05K ,60 Flat plug terminal 2 x 2.8mm insulated, frame IV Design no. 10E 11E HS ,80 Design no. 10E 22E HS ,10 Auxiliary contact block DIN EN for front snap-on mounting Screw terminal, frame IV S Any design no. 20 HS 05K ,80 Any design no. 11 HS 05K ,80 Any design no. 02 HS 05K ,80 Any design no. 40 HS 05K ,60 Any design no. 31 HS 05K ,60 Any design no. 22 HS 05K ,60 Any design no. 13 HS 05K ,60 Any design no. 04 HS 05K ,60 Flat plug terminal 2 x 2.8mm insulated, frameiv Any design no. 40 HS ,90 Any design no. 31 HS ,90 Any design no. 22 HS ,90 Any design no. 13 HS ,90 Any design no. 04 HS ,90 Auxiliary contact block DIN EN for side mounting Screw terminal, frame I Design no. 10E 20 HS ,05 Design no. 10E 11E HS ,05 Flat plug terminal 2 x 2.8mm insulated, frame I Design no. 10E 20 HS ,45 Design no. 10E 11E HS ,45 Solder pin terminal 1 x 1mm, frame I for soldering to PCBs Design no. 10E 20 HS ,45 for soldering to PCBs Design no. 10E 11E HS ,45 Auxiliary contact block DIN EN for side mounting Screw terminal, frame I Any design no. 10 HS ,05 Any design no. 01 HS ,05 manual operation possible Any design no. 10 HT ,30 Flat plug terminal 2 x 2.8mm insulated, frame I Any design no. 10 HS ,45 Any design no. 01 HS ,45 Solder pin terminal 1 x 1mm, frame I for soldering to PCBs Any design no. 10 HS ,45 for soldering to PCBs Any design no. 01 HS ,45 Pick-up delay s with connecting wires for coil operating voltages Us = V AC/DC Any design no. EV Pick-up delay mounting EV 05b F 5

82 F Contactors AC contactors Accessories for compact contactors Overvoltage suppressor for front mounting to contactor Description for Contactors DIN Designation Packing E-No. Typ LS 02K, LS 05 EN... units RC unit US = 12-60V 50/60Hz Any design no. EB US = V 50/60Hz Any design no. EB Diode US = 6-240V DC Any design no. EB Connecting bridge for parallel connection of 2, 3 or 4 poles (also for type LS 07) Screw terminal Any design no Mechanical interlock for mounting between 2 contactors with mounting clamps Set Any design no. VB Spare coils Please note type/order no. end digits -XX LS 02K, LS 05 (3- und 4-pole) AC C 130-XX XX0 LS 02K, LS 05 (3- und 4-pole) DC C 133-XX XX0 no coil change possible on LS 07 and Interface contactors Type-/E-No. voltage suffix for spare coils for contactors LS 02K and LS 05 AC-operation suffix -8C E K P Hz [V] Hz [V] AC-operation suffix C -68-5D Double frequency coil 50/60 Hz [V] DC-operation 1 ) suffix -1A -1B -00-1C -1D -1E F -18-1G J -20 (Maximum coil voltage m m m m m m m only 250V/DC) DC [V] Remark: Use suffix only with E-No. of the basic execution, e.g. suffix for DC only with contactors with DC-coil on the lable of the contactors, you will find the suffix according to above table, e.g. 24 V, 50 Hz = suffix -85. On invoices / order confirmations etc. from our system, the suffix has 3 digits, end digit = 0, e.g. suffix is Ordering example for spare coils: Spare coils for type LS 02K with 24V 50Hz Type C , E-No Mehrpreis: For coils from table with designation»m«a price increase has to be considered. 1) Coupling contactors (Interface) 1,2W or 2W at DC 24V no coil change possible. F 6

83 Contactors AC contactors F LS... K-contactors AC operation DC operation 230V 50Hz 24V DC Power rating [kw], AC-3, 3~ Designation Packing E-No. E-No. 230V 400V 500V 690V units 3-pole Screw terminal LS 4K , LS 4K , LS 4K , LS 5K , LS 5K , LS 5K , LS 7K , LS 7K , LS 7K , LS 11K , LS 11K ,40 7, LS 11K ,40 Dual box type terminal LS 15K , LS 15K , LS 15K , LS 15K , LS 18K , LS 18K , LS 18K , LS 22K , LS 22K , LS 22K.00 AC/DC 1 ) , LS 30K , LS 30K , LS 30K.00 AC/DC 1 ) , LS 37K , LS 37K , LS 37K.00 AC/DC 1 ) , LS 45K , LS 45K , LS 45K.00 AC/DC 1 ) , LS 55K , LS 55K , LS 55K.00 AC/DC 1 ) ,00 Screw terminal LS 75K , LS 75K.11 AC/DC 1 ) , LS 90K , LS 90K.11 AC/DC 1 ) , LS 110K , LS 110K.11 AC/DC 1 ) , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,00 Screw terminal with AC/DC electronic coil 1 ) AC/ DC operation DC operation V 50/60Hz, DC 24-28V DC LS 132K.22 AC/DC 1 ) , LS 160K.22 AC/DC 1 ) , LS 220K.22 AC/DC 1 ) , LS 280K.22 AC/DC 1 ) , LS 375K.22 AC/DC 1 ) ,00 AC operation Screw terminal ( V 50/60Hz AC) V 50/60Hz LS 450K , , , , , ,00 Deviating operation voltages and E-No. voltage suffix see page F 9 1) AC/DC-electronic coil for AC and DC operation with E-No. end digit -400 only DC 24-28V F 7

84 F Contactors AC contactors LS... K-contactors 4-pole AC operation DC operation 230V 50Hz 24V DC Power rating, AC-3, 3~ AC-1 Designation Packing E-No. E-No. 230V 400V [kw] I e [A] units Screw terminal LS 5K , LS 5K , , , LS 7K , LS 7K , LS 11K , LS 11K ,00 Dual box type terminal LS 15K , LS 15K , LS 18K , LS 18K , LS 18K-4.00 AC/DC 1 ) , LS 18K AC/DC 1 ) , LS 30K , LS 30K , LS 30K-4.00 AC/DC 1 ) , LS 30K AC/DC 1 ) , LS 37K , LS 37K AC/DC 1 ) , , , , , , , , , , , , LS 45K , LS 45K-4.00 AC/DC 1 ) ,00 Screw terminal LS 55K , LS 55K-4.11 AC/DC 1 ) , LS 90K , LS 90K-4.11 AC/DC 1 ) , , , ,00 AC/ DC operation DC operation Screw terminal with AC/DC electronic coil 1 ) V 50/60Hz, DC 24-28V DC LS 132K-4.11 AC/DC 1) , , LS 160K-4.11 AC/DC 1) , , LS 220K-4.11 AC/DC 1) , , LS 280K-4.11 AC/DC 1) , , LS 375K-4.11 AC/DC 1) , ,00 AC operation Screw terminal V 50/60Hz LS 450K ,00 Deviating operation voltages and E-No. voltage suffix see page F 9 1) Contactors with AC/DC electronic coil can be used for DC or AC Hz, with voltage suffix -400 only for V F 8

85 Contactors AC contactors F LS... K-contactors E-No. voltage suffix XX0 for contactors Type LS 4K up to LS 450K AC-operation suffix -8C E K -69-8M P S LS 4K - LS 110K (3-pole) 50 Hz [V] ) LS 5K-4 - LS 90K-4 (4-pole) Hz [V] ) AC-operation Double frequency coil 2 ) suffix C -68-5D LS 4K - LS 55K (3-pole) 50/60 Hz [V] LS 5K-4 - LS 45K-4 (4-pole) 115 DC-operation suffix -1A -1B -00-1C -1D -1E F -18-1G H -1J -20-1K LS 4K - LS 18K (3-pole) m m m m m m m m m m m LS 5K - LS 15K (4-pole) DC [V] AC/DC-electronic coil suffix ) LS 22K - LS 55K (3-pole) 50/60 Hz, DC LS 18K - LS 45K (4-pole) [V] AC/DC-electronic coil suffix ) LS 75K - LS 375K (3- and 4-pole) 50/60 Hz, DC LS 55K-4 (4-pole) [V] AC-operation suffix only for LS 450K 50/60 Hz [V] Remark: Use suffix only with E-No. of the basic execution, e.g. suffix for DC only with contactors with DC-coil on the lable of the contactors, you will find the suffix according to above table, e.g. 24 V, 50 Hz = suffix -85. On invoices / order confirmations etc. from our system, the suffix has 3 digits, end digit = 0, e.g. suffix is Ordering example : Contactor type LS 5K-4.00 (4-pole, screw term.) with e.g. coil 24V 50Hz E-No or e.g. coil DC 48V E-No For contactors from table with designation»m«a price increase has to be considered. 1) only up to LS 55K (3-pole) resp. LS 45K-4 2) for larger types see AC/DC-electronic coil for 50/60Hz and for DC. 3) only for DC 24-28V, not for AC 50/60Hz F 9

86 F Contactors AC contactors Accessories LS... K-contactors Auxiliary contact block, 1 contact Description fits contactors Designation Packing E-No. Type... units Screw terminal, for front snap-on mounting, DIN EN , DIN EN LS 4K - LS 55K, HS 7K ,75 not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) HS 7K ,75 extended contact travel HS 7V ,45 HS 7V ,45 Auxiliary contact block, 2 contacts Screw terminal, for side mounting, DIN EN , DIN EN LS 4K - LS 450K HS 8K ,70 HS 8K ,70 R: for mounting more than 4 front LS 22K - LS 450K, HS 8R ,70 or 2 side-mounted auxiliary contacts LS 18K-4 HS 8R ,70 Timer, pneumatic, 2 contacts Delayed ON, pneumatically delayed auxiliary contact, DIN EN s LS 4K - LS 55K, TMD , s not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) TMD ,50 Delayed OFF, pneumatically delayed auxiliary contact, DIN EN s LS 4K - LS 55K, TMI , s not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) TMI ,50 Mechanical latch, 1 contact Overvoltage suppressor Directly parallel to the coil terminals A1/A2 adaptable without cable Timer, electronic (outgoing units) Directly parallel to the coil terminals A1/A2 adaptable without cable With electronic impulse or manual, for front snap-on mounting, DIN EN Hz [V] 60 Hz [V] DC [V] LS 4K - LS 55K, WBK ,50 not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) WBK ,50 WBK ,50 WBK ,50 WBK ,50 WBK ,50 WBK ,50 RC unit, for AC-operated contactors Ue 24-48V LS 4K - LS 15K, LR 2K ,00 Ue V LS 18K (3-pole) LR 2K ,00 Ue V LR 2K ,40 Ue 24-48V LS 18K-4, LS 22K - LS 55K, LR 3K ,50 Ue V LS 75K, LS 90K (3-pole), LR 3K ,50 Ue V not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) LR 3K ,50 Ue 24V LS 110K, LR 5K ,50 Ue V LS 55K-4, LS 90K-4 LR 5K ,50 Ue V LR 5K ,50 Diode, for DC-operated contactors Ue V LS 4K - LS 15K, LDK ,40 LS 18K (3-pole) Varistor, for AC or DC-operated contactors Ue 24-48V LS 4K - LS 55K, LV 3K ,70 Ue V LS 75K, LS 90K (3-pole), LV 3K ,00 Ue V not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) LV 3K ,70 ON-delay 0.1-2s LS 4K - LS 55K, TED 2 (BTLEC02) , s not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) TED 30 (BTLEC30) ,80 OFF-delay 0.1-2s LS 4K - LS 55K, TEI 2 (BTLED02) , s not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) TEI 30 (BTLED30) ,50 F 10

87 Contactors AC contactors F Accessories LS... K-contactors Interface module (outgoing models) Directly parallel to the coil terminals A1/A2 adaptable without cable Description fits contactors Designation Packing E-No. Type... units with relay Ue 24V LS 4K - LS 55K IM 1K (BILRD) ,80 Ue 48V not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) IM 1K (BILRE) ,80 operation by relay or directly Ue 24V LS 4K - LS 55K IM 2K (BILRMD) ,90 Ue 48V not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) IM 2K (BILRME) ,90 via semi-conductor Ue 24V LS 4K - LS 55K IM 3K (BILSD) ,00 not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) switch module and direct switching possible Ue V LS 4K - LS 55K IM 4K (BILMJ) ,00 Ue V not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) IM 4K (BILMR) ,00 Interlock Mechanical LS 4K - LS 18K LUV18K ,50 LS 22K - LS 55K LUV55K ,50 not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) Mechanical/ electrical 2NC contacts LS 4K - LS 18K LUV18E ,70 LS 22K - LS 55K LUV55E ,10 not for LS 55K-4 (4-pole) Mechanical, horizontal contactor mounting LS 75K - LS 375K LUV375H ,90 Mechanical, vertical contactor mounting LS 75K - LS 160K, LUV375V ,00 LS 375K 1 ) LS 450 K LUV450V ,00 Terminal cover For the main terminals used with busbars, protection acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 for fitting to screw ends M M8 (1 set = 2 items) LS 75K, LS 90K (3-pol.) KLA 90K ,90 for 1-pole units, order 3 for 3-pole contactors M10 (1 set = 6 items) LS 110K - LS 375K KLA ,80 order 2 for 4-pole contactors LS 90K-4 Device marking parts for identification and marking Labelling system 10 sheets with 260 labels each LS 4K - LS 450K EAT ,30 Label carrier SPR ,60 Exchange adapter Exchange aid if replacing LS-contactors by LS...K-contactors with mounting rail contour acc. to DIN EN (LS 4-17), LS 27, LS 37 LS 4K - LS 18K AD ,70 LS LS 22K - LS 45K AD ,20 LS 107 LS 55K (3-pole) AD ,40 1) LS 220K and LS 280K only with Type LUV 375H (horizontal) F 11

88 F Contactors AC contactors Spare parts LS... K-contactors Main contact set (3 NO-contacts) Main contact set (2 NO + 2 NC contacts) Description fits contactors Designation Packing E-No. Type... units 1 set = 3 units 1 unit = 2 fixed contacts, 1 contact bridge and accessories for 3- and 4-pole contactors LS 4K CS ,80 (order 2 for 4-pole contactors) LS 5K CS ,40 LS 7K CS ,10 LS 11K CS ,10 LS 15K CS ,10 LS 18K CS ,10 LS 22K CS ,50 LS 30K CS ,00 LS 37K CS ,00 LS 45K CS ,00 LS 55K CS ,00 LS 55K-4 CS 55F ,00 LS 75K CS ,00 LS 90K CS ,00 LS 110K CS ,00 LS 132K CS ,00 LS 160K CS ,00 LS 220K CS ,00 LS 280K CS ,00 LS 375K CS ,00 LS 450K CS ,00 1 set = 4 units 1 unit = 2 fixed contacts, 1 contact bridge and accessories for 4-pole contactors LS...K-22 LS 5K-22 CS 5C ,10 LS 7K-22 CS 7C ,10 LS11K-22 CS 11C ,40 LS 15K-22 CS 15C ,10 LS 18K-22 CS 18C ,80 LS 30K-22 CS 30C ,00 LS 37K-22 CS 37C ,00 F 12

89 Contactors AC contactors F Spare coils for alternation of control voltages of existing contactors fits contactors Designation Packing E-No. Type.. units For contactors with AC operation AC coil for LS 4K - LS 7K, LS 11K (3-pole) C 650-XX XX0 20,20 for LS 11K (4-pole), LS 15K, LS 18K (3-pole) C 652-XX XX0 24,40 for LS 18K (4-pole), LS 22K - LS 45K, LS 55K (3-pole) C 653-XX XX0 44,80 for LS 75K, LS 90K (3-pole) C 654-XX XX0 78,00 for LS 55K-4 (4-pole), LS 110K (3-pole) C 655-XX XX0 78,00 LS 90K-4 (4-pole) C 656-XX XX0 78,00 LS 450K (3-, 4-pole) coil C 668-XX XX0 248,00 Control circuit with rectifier C 675-XX XX0 248,00 For contactors with electronic coil»ac/dc«ac/dc coil incl. electronic module LS 18K (4-pole), LS 22K - LS 45K, LS 55K (3-pole) C 664-XX XX0 114,00 electronic coil and electronic module LS 75K, LS 90K (3-pole) coil C 665-XX XX0 78,00 AC/DC-module CM 672-XX XX0 384,00 LS 110K - LS 160K (3-pole), LS 55K-4 (4-pole)coil C 667-XX XX0 78,00 AC/DC-module CM 671-XX XX0 384,00 LS 375K, LS 90K-4 - LS 160K-4 (4-pole) coil C 666-XX XX0 205,00 AC/DC-modul CM 670-XX XX0 381,00 LS 220K, LS 280K coil C 674-XX XX0 205,00 AC/DC-modul CM 673-XX XX0 381,00 For contactors with DC operation LS 4K - LS 7K, LS 11K (3-pole) DC coil C 660-XX XX0 43,20 LS 11K (4-pole), LS 15K, LS 18K (3-pole) C 662-XX XX0 63,20 Type-/E-No. voltage suffix For spare coils for contactors type LS 4K - LS 450K AC-operation suffix -8C E K -69-8M P S (not for LS 450K) 50 Hz [V] ) Hz [V] ) AC-operation Double frequency coil 1 ) suffix C -68-5D (not for LS 450K) 50/60 Hz [V] DC-operation suffix -1A -1B -00-1C -1D -1E F -18-1G H -1J -20-1K m m m m m m m m m m m DC [V] AC/DC-electronic coil / -module suffix ) LS 22K - LS 55K (3-pole) 50/60 Hz, DC LS 18K - LS 45K (4-pole) [V] AC/DC-electronic coil / -module suffix ) LS 75K - LS 375K (3- and 4-pole) 50/60 Hz, DC LS 55K-4 (4-pole) [V] AC-operation suffix only for LS 450K 50/60 Hz [V] Remark: Use suffix only with E-No. of the basic execution, e.g. suffix for DC only with contactors with DC-coil on the lable of the contactors, you will find the suffix according to above table, e.g. 24 V, 50 Hz = suffix -85. On invoices / order confirmations etc. from our system, the suffix has 3 digits, end digit = 0, e.g. suffix is Ordering example : Spare coil for contactor type LS 4K e.g. coil 24V 50Hz: Type C , E-Nr or spare coil for contactor type LS 11K e.g. coil DC 48V: Type C , E-Nr For spare coils from table with designation»m«a price increase has to be considered. 1) only for LS 4K - LS 55K (3-pole) and LS 5K-4 - LS 45K-4 (4-pole) 2) only for DC 24-28V, not for AC 50/60Hz F 13

90 F Contactors AC contactors Contactors for capacitor switching kvar values at ambient temperature +55 C AC operation 230V 50Hz Power rating [kw], AC-3, 3~ Designation Packing E-No. 230V 400V 500V 690V units Connection by screws LS12KCW.20A LS12KCW.11A LS12KCW.02A LS16KCW.20A LS16KCW.11A LS16KCW.02A LS20KCW.10A LS20KCW.01A LS20KCW.21A LS20KCW.12A LS25KCW.10A LS25KCW.01A LS25KCW.21A LS25KCW.12A Dual box terminals LS30KCW.10A LS30KCW.01A LS30KCW.21A LS30KCW.12A LS45KCW.10A LS45KCW.01A LS45KCW.20A LS45KCW.11A LS45KCW.12A LS55KCW.10A LS55KCW.01A LS55KCW.20A LS55KCW.11A LS55KCW.12A LS70KCW.10A LS70KCW.01A LS70KCW.20A LS70KCW.11A LS70KCW.12A Suffix for designation and E-no XX0 for capacitor switching Type LS 12KCW bis LS 70KCW Alternating current Suffix -8C E K -69-8M P S LS 12KCW - LS 70KCW (3-poles) 50 Hz [V] Hz [V] Alternating current. Dual frequency Suffix C -68-5D LS 12KCW - LS 70KCW -poles) Hz [V] F 14

91 Contactors AC contactors F LS...-Contactors, 3-pole Please note the new LS... Compact contactors with extensive, modular accessories (Page F 7 to F 13) AC operation DC operation 230V 50Hz 24V DC Power rating [kw], AC-3, 3~ Designation Packing E-No. E-No. 230V 400V 500V 690V units Screw terminal up to LS 37 with screw and rail mounting LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , , , , , , , , , , , , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , , , , , , , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , , ,00 AC operation DC operation 1 ) 230V 50Hz 220V DC Dual box type terminal LS , LS , LS , LS , LS , LS ) ,00 Screw terminal LS , LS ) , LS , LS ) , , , , , , , , , , ,00 - Contactors with integrated coil wiring and coupling relay (interface) see page F 15 - Auxiliary switch arrangement LS LS on request - Additional auxiliary switch HS 107 for type LS 47 - LS 307 see page F 16 - DC-operated contactors with economy circuit type LS LS on request Deviating operation voltages and E-No. suffix see page F 18 1) DC-operated contactors with economy circuit, 1NC internal used, LS LS 307 with auxiliary switch arrangement ".12" 2) AC-operated contactors with electronic coil control device (ELSA) F 15

92 F Contactors AC contactors LS...-Contactors Please note the new LS... Compact contactors with extensive, modular accessories (Page F 7 to F 13) AC operation DC operation 230V 50Hz 24V DC Power rating [kw], AC-3, 3~ Designation Packing E-No. E-No. 230V 400V 500V 690V units 3-pole, with integrated coil wiring Screw terminal LS 4.22 (diode) LS 4.22 (V/bz) 1 ) , LS 7.22 (diode) LS (diode) LS (V/bz) 1 ) , LS (diode) LS (V/bz) 1 ) ,00 Dual box type terminal LS (RC) 2 ) , LS (RC) 2 ) , LS (RC) 2 ) , LS (RC) 2 ) , LS (RC) 2 ) ,00 Screw terminal LS (RC) 2 ) , LS (RC) 2 ) , , , , , , , ,00 3-pole, coupling contactor (interface) with integrated varistor Screw terminal, only with DC operation DC 24V (4,8W) LS LS LS , , ,00 4-pole Screw terminal LS , LS , LS , , , ,00 Capacitor contactor for parallel operation AC operation 230V 50Hz Power rating [kvar], AC-6b, 3~ Packing E-No. 230V 400V 525V 690V unit Screw terminal with early make contacts LS 7C ,80 Screw terminal with early make contacts and resistors 3 ) LS 7CW , LS 27CW , LS 37CW ,00 1) AC current with varistor up to LS 37, also for 42V 50Hz ; DC current with bidirectional Z-diode only available for DC 24V 2) With RC-combination 3) With resistors for suppressing the switch-on peak current. Early make contacts are parallel to the main contacts. Deviating operation voltages and E-No. suffix see page F 18 F 16

93 Contactors AC contactors F Accessories LS...-Contactors Please note the new LS... Compact contactors with extensive, modular accessories (Page F 7 to F 13) Auxiliary switch, 1 contact Description for contactors Designation Packing E-No. type... units. Screw terminal, for front snap-on mounting on LS...-Contactors LS 4-17 max. 3 items LS 4 - LS 37 HS (1s) ,65 LS 27, LS 37 max. 4 items (single-tier) HS (1ö) ,65 HS 17V.10 (1Sp.-ö) ,45 HS 17V.01 (1Fr.-s) ,45 HT push button for manual operation only HT (Tast., 1s) ,75 Auxiliary switch, 2 contacts Screw terminal, for side mounting on LS...-Contactors for subsequent mounting in pairs LS 47 - LS 637 HS ,50 (order no. = 2 items) for contactors with economy switching LS 47 - LS 87 HS GS ,00 (order no. = 1 item) LS LS 307 HS GS ,90 Mechanical latch Interlock 1 ) with electrical impulse or manual, for front snap-on mounting 50 Hz [V] 60 Hz [V] DC [V] LS 4 - LS 37 (single-tier) WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 mechanical, for side mounting as a kit between 2 contactors AC operation LS 4 - LS 37 LUV 1 (AC) ,70 DC operation LS 4 - LS 17, LS 37 LUV 1 (DC) ,70 Surge arrester RC-Combinaton for AC-coils D-Combination for DC-coils A2 module Improved accessibility to»a2«in the contactor-overload relay combination. LA2 module With anti-parallel LED s 17-33V AC/DC Contactors with surge arresters LS 4 - LS 247 see page F 15 with connecting terminal M3 to 2 x 2.5mm2 and connecting wire from the connecting terminal to coil connection point»a2«. Connection terminal and LS 4 - LS 17, LS 37 A2-Modul connection wires b 77S With V AC neon lamp Connection terminal and LS 4 - LS 17, LS 37 LA2-Modul connection wires b 27T, b 77S, b 177S With antiparallel LED s 17-33V AC/DC Connection terminal and LS 4 - LS 17, LS 37 LA2-Modul connection wires b 27T, b 77S, b 177S 1) Kit containing 3 clamps for contactors of same size and snap-on mounting. With screw fixation a combination of different types are available. For contactors LS 47 - LS 307, see page F 21 F 17

94 F Contactors AC contactors Accessories LS...-Contactors Identification label Description for contactors Designation Packing E-No. type... units For snap-on mounting in terminal covers, can be labelled using a waterproof marker (Z-Nr R01) LS-Contactors, KZS b 27T - b 721Sw Terminal cover for contactors without box terminal block For mounting on LS 47-87, 1 set = 2 items (contact protection device acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100) fixing with arcing chamber LS 47 - LS 87 KLA ,80 Box terminal block, 3-pole For mounting on screw ends M..., 1 set = 6 items (contact protection device acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100) M6 LS 107, LS 147 KLA ,90 M8 LS 177 KLA ,70 M10 LS LS 307 KLA ,00 M10 LS LS 637 KLA ,80 3-way dual box type terminal, contact safety device acc.to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 spare part for contactors with box terminal block LS 47 - LS 87 RKB ,10 LS LS 147 RKB ,30 b 177S (to 160A) Exchange adapter Mounting rail n-adapter Flat plug terminal (16A) can be mounted on main and/or auxiliary terminals Main contact set 1 set = 3 units, 1 unit = 2 fixed contacts1 moving contact bridge and accessories Screw-fitting for help in replacing obsolete contactor types with LS...-Contactors from the current range LS 16/L 18, LS 20 (Z-Nr R19) LS 4 - LS 37 AD ,55 LS 32, LS 36 (Z-Nr R30) LS 47 - LS 87 AD ,80 LS 60/L 84 (Z-Nr R21) LS 107, LS 147 AD ,00 LS 100/L 144 (Z-Nr R22) LS 177, LS 207 AD ,90 LS 200/L 260, LS 297 (Z-Nr R23) LS 247, LS 307 AD ,40 LS 330, LS 334 (Z-Nr R29) LS LS 637, LS 375K AD ,00 For mounting rails DIN EN , 35mm mounting on contactor base, enables quick fixing of contactor to mounting rail (Z-Nr R31) LS 47 - LS 87 ADT Flat plug 1 x 6.3 and 2 x 2.8, loose (Z-Nr ) all connections LS 4 - LS ,41 auxiliary terminals LS 27 - LS 307 Flat plug 2 x 6.3 and 4 x 2.8, loose (Z-Nr ) all connections LS 4 - LS 17 auxiliary terminals LS 27 - LS ,77 For contactors with screw terminal, 3s not interchangeable LS 4 - LS 27 LS 37 CS 37 LS ,40 For contactors with RKB..-box type terminals, 3s LS 47 CS 47 R ,00 LS 57 CS 57 R ,00 LS 77 CS 77 R ,00 LS 87 CS 87 R ,00 LS 107 CS 107 FR ,00 LS 147 CS 147 R ,00 For contactors with flat terminals, 3s LS 47 CS 47 F ,00 LS 57 CS 57 F ,00 LS 77 CS 77 F ,00 LS 87 CS 87 F ,00 LS 107 CS 107 FR ,00 LS 177 CS 177 F ,00 LS 207 CS 207 F ,00 LS 247 CS 247 F ,00 LS 307 CS 307 F ,00 fase-out types LS 407 CS 407 F ,00 LS 507 CS 507 F ,00 LS 637 CS 637 F ,00 F 18

95 Contactors AC contactors F Spare coils For changing the operating voltages of existing contactors E-No. suffix see below Description for contactors Designation Packing E-No. type... units ELSA (electronic coil control) In the case of a change of voltage, exchange coil and ELSA module E-No. voltage suffix AC SH 4, SH 8, LS 4 - LS 17 AC-coil XX0 20,20 DC DC-coil XX0 41,60 DC/economy switching (Z-Nr, R21) DC-coil Spar XX0 41,60 AC LS 27, LS 37 AC-coil XX0 22,10 DC DC-coil XX0 64,80 DC/economy switching (Z-Nr, R21) DC-coil Spar XX0 41,60 AC LS 47, LS 57, LS 77 AC-coil XX0 43,80 DC/economy switching DC-coil Spar XX0 70,10 AC LS 87 AC-coil XX0 60,10 DC/economy switching DC-coil Spar XX0 87,90 AC LS 107 AC-coil XX0 71,10 DC/economy switching DC-coil Spar XX0 101,00 AC LS 147 AC-coil 1 see ELSA - DC/economy switching DC-coil Spar XX0 114,00 AC LS 177 AC-coil XX0 77,50 DC/economy switching DC-coil Spar XX0 117,00 AC LS 207 AC-coil 1 see ELSA - DC/economy switching DC-coil Spar XX0 140,00 AC LS 247 AC-coil XX0 106,00 DC/economy switching DC-coil Spar XX0 157,00 AC LS 307 AC-coil 1 see ELSA - DC/economy switching DC-coil Spar XX0 179,00 AC LS 147 AC-coil XX0 71,60 ELSA-module XX0 367,00 AC LS 207 AC-coil XX0 78,00 ELSA-module XX0 367,00 AC LS 307 AC-coil XX0 121,00 ELSA-module XX0 367,00 AC/ DC LS LS 637 AC/DC-coil XX0 201,00 ELSA-mod. (AC) XX0 377,00 ELSA-mod. (DC) XX0 a. Anfrage XX0 for contactors type LS..., and Type-/E-No. suffix for spare coils AC-operation suffix -8C F H -8K Hz [V] Hz [V] AC-operation suffix A B -7C -7D -79-7E F m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m 0.75 U S -coil 50 Hz [V] Hz [V] AC-operation suffix C -68-5D E Double frequency coil 50/60 Hz [V] DC-operation suffix up to LS 37 DC [V] DC-operation suffix from LS 47 up to LS 307 DC [V] AC-operation with electronic coil suffix control device ELSA 2 ) 50/60 Hz [V] DC-operation with electronic coil suffix control device ELSA 3 ) DC [V] Remark: Use suffix only with E-No. of the basic execution, e.g. suffix for DC only with contactors with DC-coil on the lable of the contactors, you will find the suffix according to above table, e.g. 24 V, 50 Hz = suffix -85. On invoices / order confirmations etc. from our system, the suffix has 3 digits, end digit = 0, e.g. suffix is Ordering example for contactors: Contactor type LS 4.10 with e.g. DC-coil 220V E-Nr Ordering example for spare coils: AC-coil for type LS 4.10 with coil 24V 50Hz E-Nr For spare coils from table with designation»m«a price increase has to be considered. 2) AC-operated contactors with electronic coil control device ELSA only for type: LS 147, LS 207, LS 307, LS 407, LS 507, LS 637 3) DC-operated contactors with electronic coil control device ELSA only for type: LS 407, LS 507, LS V - R21 110V - R16 48V - R22 220V - R17 60V - R23 others - R30 F 19

96 F Contactors Contactor combinations Small insulated enclosure Empty enclosure for housing of motorstarters (contactors + therm. overload relay) Empty enclosure for compact contactors Type LS 02K or LS 05 with overload relay Type b 05 Power rating [kw], AC-3, 3~ Combination Contactors Designation Packing E-No. 230V 400V 690V units with push-buttons I-O/R, (O/R protruding) 1 ) 3 ) Lbi 02K, Lbi 05 LS 02K, LS 05 LGHV 65 IP ,20 with push-button R 1 ) 3 ) Lbi 02K, Lbi 05 LS 02K, LS 05 LGHR 65 IP ,30 Empty enclosure for compact contactors with overload relay Type b 18K with push-buttons I-O/R, (O/R protruding) 1 ) 2 ) Lbi 4K - 7K LS 4K - 7K I01K6P IP ,00 with push-button R 1 ) 3 ) Lbi 4K - 7K LS 4K - 7K I01K6R IP ,00 without push-buttons ,5-10 Lbi 4K - 7K LS 4K - 7K I01K6O IP ,50 with push-buttons I-O/R, (O/R protruding) 1 ) 2 ) Lbi 11K LS 11K I02K6P IP ,00 with push-button R 1 ) 3 ) Lbi 11K LS 11K I02K6R IP ,50 without push-buttons Lbi 11K LS 11K I02K6O IP ,00 Neutral wire terminal for I01K... and I02K... IKNL Auxiliary contact block I (Start) for I01K... and I02K... als Ersatzteil Kit for permanent switch ON For mounting on the front of thr contactor Operation via Start / I button on enclosure IKHT IKPL F 20 1) Operating push-button: I = ON, O/R = OFF and Reset, R = Reset 2) Multifunction button on overload relay set to " M-0 ". 3) Multifunction button on overload relay set to " M " resp. " H ".

97 Contactors Contactor combinations F Reversing contactor AC operation 230V 50Hz Please note the new LS... Compact- Contactors with extensive, modular accessories (Page F 7 to F 13) For screw-on and snap-on mounting Power rating [kw], AC-3, 3~ Rated current [A] Designation Packing E-No. 230V 400V 500V 690V AC-3 I e - 400V units Screw terminal LUV , LUV ,30 Flat plug terminal 1 x 6.3mm LUV , LUV ,60 For soldering to PCBs Solder pin terminal 1 x 0.8mm LUV , LUV ,60 For screw-on mounting Dual box type terminal, on base plate LUV , LUV , LUV , LUV , LUV , LUV (ELSA) ,00 Screw terminal, on base plate LUV , LUV (ELSA) , LUV , LUV (ELSA) ,00 The digits of designation e.g. 47 for LUV 47 refer to the used single contactors e.g. LS 47. Deviating operation voltages see table»e-no. voltage suffix«: LUV 07 see page F 4 (contactor LS 07) AC-operation between 24 V and 400 V. (0.75% coils double frequency and DC coils are not available for LUV 07). Type LUV , 177, 247 AC-operation between 24 and 500 V see page F 18. LUV 147, 207, 307 AC-operated with ELSA (electronic coil control device) see page F 18. Ordering example: Reversing contactor type LUV with e.g. coil 24 V 50 Hz E-No F 21

98 F Contactors Contactor combinations Reversing contactor Modular technique, self-assembling technique Interlock, mechanical Description Designation Packing E-No. units For fitting between 2 identical LS..K-Contactors for LS 02K, LS 05 VB ,40 for LS 4K - LS 18K LUV 18K 1 ) ,50 for LS 22K - LS 55K LUV 55K 1 ) ,50 for LS 75K - LS 375K, horizontal design LUV 375H ,90 for LS 75K - LS 160K, LS 375K, vertical design LUV 375V 2 ) ,00 for LS 450K, vertical design LUV 450V ,00 For fitting between 2 identical LS..-Contactors for LS 4 - LS 37, AC operation LUV 1 (AC) ,70 for LS 4 - LS 17, LS 37, DC operation LUV 1 (DC) ,70 Kits For mechanical interlocking of 2 LS-Contactors on base plate 3 ) with base plate, locking device and 2 x HS 107/LUV, AC operation for LS 47 - LS 87 Kit ,00 for LS 107, LS 147 Kit ,00 for LS 177, LS 207 Kit ,00 for LS 247, LS 307 Kit ,00 1) Also available with integrated electrical interlocking: LUV 18E: , LUV 55E: , see page F 11 2) LS 220K and LS 280K only with type LUV 375H (horizontal) 3) Auxiliary switch HS 107/LUV for exchange against the existing auxiliary switches on contactors and adjustment plates for tolerance adjustment of the lock device swivel lever. F 22

99 Contactors Contactor combinations F Star-delta starter Type LSD... Star-deltastarter for self-assembly with the new LS... Compact-Contactors see selection table in the Control components catalogue, p. 4/10 YD-starter AC 230V 50Hz 1 ) Power rating [kw], AC-3,3~ Rated current Main, Star Type Packing E-No. 230V 400V 500V 690V AC-3 Ie 400V Delta units Screw terminal, for mounting on mounting rail 2 ) LS 4 LS 4 LSD , LS 17 LS 7 LSD , LS 27 LS 27 LSD , LS 37 LS 27 LSD ,00 Screw terminal, base plate 3 ) LS 47 LS 37 LSD , LS 57 LS 47 LSD , LS 77 LS 57 LSD , LS 87 LS 57 LSD , LS 107 LS 77 LSD , LS 177 LS 107 LSD , LS 247 LS 177 LSD , LS 307 LS 177 LSD ,00 YD-starter DC 24V Screw terminal, for mounting on mounting rail 2 ) LS 4 LS 4 LSD , LS 17 LS 7 LSD , LS 37 LS 37 LSD ,00 1) Deviating operation voltages for AC-operation: on request 2) Common lead wire to main contactor with works fitted connection from main to delta contactor 3) Separate lead wire to main and delta contactors. Accessories LSD-starter combinations Terminal cover LSD main connections from LSD 47 with D-terminals integrated LSD 177 main connections from contactor LS 177 see page F 17 Contactors see page F 14 Accessories contactors see page F 16 to F 18 Thermal overload relays see page G 6, G 7 Star-delta timer see page H 3 Starter over-all cover from LSD 177 included in scope of supply LSD...-enclosures on request F 23

100 F Contactors Contactor combinations Safety relays for EMERGENCY OFF or safety guard control Press safety, functional units on request Basic unit Description Designation Packing E-No. units DC 24V SRN ,00 AC 24V SRN ,00 AC 230V SRN ,00 Extension unit DC 24V ERN ,00 AC 24V ERN ,00 AC 230V ERN ,00 F 24

101 Contactors Auxiliary contactors F Mini, compact, SH...-Contactors AC operation DC operation 230V 50Hz 24V DC Rated current [A] DIN EN Designation Packing E-No. E-No. 230V AC-14/15 24V DC-13 Design no. units. 4 contacts 8 contacts 10 contacts Mini-relay, screw terminal E SH , E SH , E SH , E SH ,50 Mini-relay, flat plug terminal 1 x 6.3mm resp. 2 x 2.8mm E SH , E SH , E SH , E SH ,70 Mini-relay, solder pin terminal E SH , E SH , E SH ,70 Compact-relay, screw terminal up to 6 auxiliary contacts can be added E SH , E SH , E SH ,60 Compact-relay, flat plug terminal 2 x 2.8mm insulated up to 6 auxiliary contacts can be added E SH , E SH , E SH ,30 SH 5-relay, screw terminal up to 4 auxiliary contacts can be added E SH , E SH , E SH , E SH , E ü SH 5V ,90 SH 4-relay, screw terminal up to 3 auxiliary contacts can be added E SH , E SH , E SH ,40 SH 8-relay, screw terminal E SH , Eü SH 8.44ü 1 ) , Eü SH 8.44ü 2) , E SH , Eü SH 8.53ü , E SH , Eü SH 8.62ü , E SH , E SH ,90 SH 10-relay, screw terminal E SH , Eü SH 10.55ü , E SH , E SH , üE SH 10.73ü , E SH , E SH , E SH , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,00 Voltage suffix see page F 31 1) Overlapping contacts and ) Overlapping contacts and F 25

102 F Contactors Auxiliary contactors Coupling relays (interface) for operation on electronic controls, only available for 24V DC operating voltage Screw terminal DC operation 24V DC Rated current [A] DIN EN Power Consumption Designation Packing E-No. 230V AC-14/15 24V DC-13 Designation no. at 24V DC units 4 contacts Compact relay, no auxiliary contacts can be added E 1.2 W ( Us) SH E 1.2 W ( Us) SH E 1.2 W ( Us) SH , , ,70 8 contacts Compact relay, up to 2 auxiliary contacts can be added E 2 W ( Us) SH E 2 W ( Us) SH E 2 W ( Us) SH SH 4 relay, varistor, no auxiliary contacts can be added E 4. 8 W ( Us) SH E 4. 8 W ( Us) SH SH 8 relay, varistor E 4. 8 W ( Us) SH E 4. 8 W ( Us) SH , , , , , , ,00 F 26

103 Contactors Auxiliary contactors F Integrated coil operation Screw terminal AC operation DC operation 230V 50Hz 24V DC Rated current [A] DIN EN Designation Packing E-No. E-No. 230V AC-14/15 24V DC-13 Design no. units. 4 contacts 8 contacts Mini relay SH 8-relay E SH (V/D) 1 ) , E SH (V/D) 1 ) , E SH (V/D) 1 ) ,70 SH 4-relay, up to 3 auxiliary contacts can be added E SH 4.22 (Diode) E SH 4.31 (Diode) E SH 4.40 (Diode) E SH 8.44 (V/bZ) 2 ) , E SH 8.53 (Diode) Eü SH 8.53ü (V/bZ) 2 ) , E SH 8.62 (Diode) E SH 8.62 (V/bZ) 2 ) , , , , , , , , , , , ,00 10 contacts SH 10-relay E SH (V) 2 ) , Eü SH 10.55ü (V) 2 ) , Eü SH 10.73ü(V/bZ) 2 ) , E SH (V) 2 ) , , delayed contacts 4 contacts with integrated suppression element 3 ) SH 4-relay E SH , with TP40I (V) 2 ) SH 4-relay E SH contacts with integrated suppression element 3 ) SH 8-relay E SH ) AC-operated with integrated varistor (V), with E-No. end digit -850 also available for 24V 50Hz. DC-operated with integrated diode (D). 2) AC-operated with integrated varistor (V), with E-No. end digit -840 also available for 42V 50Hz. DC-operated with integrated bidirectional Z-diode (bz) only DC 24 V. 3) With integrated suppression element, 4 pole, delayed off for safety relays see wiring diagram of type SAC 8. F 27

104 F Contactors Auxiliary contactors Accessories Compact-contactors SH 05 Description Attachable to relay DIN Designation Packing E-No. type LS 02K, LS 05 EN... units Auxiliary switch DIN EN for front snap-on mounting Screw terminal, frame IV S Design no. 40E 44E HS 05K ,60 53E HS 05K ,60 62E HS 05K ,60 71E HS 05K ,60 80E HS 05K ,60 Flat plug terminal 2 x 2,8mm insulated, frame IV Design no. 40E 44E HS ,90 53E HS ,90 62E HS ,90 71E HS ,90 80E HS ,90 Auxiliary switch DIN EN for front snap-on mounting Auxiliary switch DIN EN for side mounting Screw terminal, frame IV S Any design no. 20 HS 05K ,80 11 HS 05K ,80 02 HS 05K ,80 40 HS 05K ,60 31 HS 05K ,60 22 HS 05K ,60 13 HS 05K ,60 04 HS 05K ,60 Flat plug terminal 2 x 2.8mm insulated, frame IV Any design no. 40 HS ,90 31 HS ,90 22 HS ,90 13 HS ,90 04 HS ,90 Screw terminal, frame I Any design no. 10 HS ,05 10 HS ,05 may be hand-operated 10 HT ,30 Flat plug terminal 2 x 2.8mm insulated, frame I Any design no. 10 HS ,45 10 HS ,45 Solder pin terminal 1 x 1mm, frame I for soldering to PCB's Any design no. 10 HS ,45 10 HS ,45 Pick-up delay 0,5-60s for front or side mounting With connecting wires for relay operating voltages U S = V AC/DC Any design no. EV Pick-up delay mounting For fixing to rails DIN EN EV 05b Overvoltage suppressor for front snap-on mounting RC-unit U S = 12-60V 50/60Hz Any design no. EB U S = V 50/60Hz EB Diode U S = 6-240V DC Any design no. EB Mechanical interlock for mounting between 2 relays with clamps Set Any design no. VB F 28

105 Contactors Auxiliary contactors F Accessories Contactors Type SH 04, SH 4 - SH 10 Descriptions Attachable to relay Designation Packing E-No. type... units Auxiliary switch, 1 contact for front snap-on mounting Screw terminal, for front snap-on mounting on SH 4-relay max. 3 pieces snap-on SH 4 (single tier) HS (1NC) ,65 HS (1NO) ,65 HS 17V.10 (1Sp.-NO) ,45 HS 17V.01 (1Fr.-NC) ,45 Push-button HT only for manual operation HT (Tast., 1NC) ,75 Timer module, 2 contacts pneumatically delayed auxiliary contact for front snap-on mounting Screw terminal, ON-delay s SH 4 (single tier) TP 40 D , s TP 180 D ,40 Screw terminal, OFF-delay 0,1-40s SH 4 (single tier) TP 40 I , s TP 180 I ,00 Mechanical latch for front snap-on mounting With electrical impulse or manual 50 Hz [V] 60 Hz [V] DC [V] SH 4 (single tier) WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 WB 30/ ,00 Interlock 1 ) mechanical, for mounting between 2 relays AC operation SH 4, SH 8, SH 10 LUV 1 (AC) DC operation SH 4, SH 8, SH 10 LUV 1 (DC) Overvoltage suppressor RC-units (for AC-operated relays) SH 04, SH 4 - SH 10 see catalogue "Steuerungskomponenten", page 5/11 D-units (for DC-operated relays) SH 04, SH 4 - SH 10 see catalogue "Steuerungskomponenten", page 5/12 Coils with factory built-in suppressor SH 04, SH 4 - SH 10 see page F 26 LA2-Module With terminal accepting M3 up to 2 x 2.5mm 2 and connection to the contact or coil terminal "A2" and 1 additional lead, pilot light for indication of switching position. with neon lamp V AC SH 04, SH 4 - SH 10 LA2-Module with antiparallel LED s 17-33V AC/DC SH 04, SH 4 - SH 10 LA2-Module Identification label for snap fitting to contactor terminal covers Description with water proof fibre pen (Z-Nr R01) SH 04, SH 4 - SH 10 KZS Flat plug terminal (16A) for fixing auxiliary terminals Flat plug 1 x 6.3 resp. 2 x 2.8, loose Auxiliary terminals (Z-Nr ) SH 4, SH 8, SH Flat plug 2 x 6.3 resp. 4 x 2.8, loose Auxiliary terminals (Z-Nr ) SH 4, SH 8, SH ) The assembly contains 3 clamping brackets for combination of 2 relays of the same size of DIN rail mounting. At screw mounting interlocking of 2 contactors of different size possible. F 29

106 F Contactors Auxiliary contactors Accessories Contactors Type SH 5 Description Designation Packing E-No. units Auxiliary switch, 1 contact for front snap-on mounting, DIN EN , DIN EN Screw terminal HS 7K ,75 HS 7K ,75 extended contact travel HS 7V ,45 extended contact travel HS 7V ,45 Auxiliary switch, 2 contacts for timer module mounting, DIN EN , DIN EN Screw terminal HS 8R ,70 HS 8R ,70 Timer, pneumatic, 2 contacts pneumatically delayed auxiliary contacts, DIN EN ON-delay s TMD , s TMD ,50 OFF-delay s TMI , s TMI ,50 Mechanical latch, 1 contact for front snap-on mounting, DIN EN With electronic impulse or manual 50 Hz [V] 60 Hz [V] DC [V] WBK ,50 WBK ,50 WBK ,50 WBK ,50 WBK ,50 WBK ,50 WBK ,50 Overvoltage suppressor directly connected parallel to the coil terminals A1/A2 without cable RC unit, for AC-operated contactors Ue 24-48V LR 2K ,00 Ue V LR 2K ,00 Ue V LR 2K ,40 Diode, for DC-operated contactors Ue V LDK ,40 Varistor, for AC or DC-operated contactors Ue 24-48V LV 3K ,70 Ue V LV 3K ,00 Ue V LV 3K ,70 Timer module, electronic (Fase out) directly connected parallel to the coil terminals A1/A2 without cable ON-delay 0.1-2s TED 2 (BTLEC02) , s TED 30 (BTLEC30) ,80 OFF-delay 0.1-2s TEI 2 (BTLED02) , s TEI 30 (BTLED30) ,50 F 30

107 Contactors Auxiliary contactors F Accessories Contactors Type SH 5 Interface module (Fase out) directly connected parallel to the coil terminals A1/A2 without cable Description Designation Packing E-No. units With relay Ue 24V IM 1K (BILRD) ,80 Ue 48V IM 1K (BILRE) ,80 With relay and direct switch-on possibility Ue 24V IM 2K (BILRMD) ,90 Over semiconductor Ue 24V IM 3K (BILSD) ,00 Switch module and direct switch-on possibility Ue V IM 4K (BILMJ) ,00 Ue V IM 4K (BILMR) ,00 Interlock for side mounting Mechanical LUV18K Mechanical/ electronical 2NO (NC) LUV18E Spare coils for SH 05 - SH 10 Description Applicable for relays designation packing E-No. type... unit no coil exchange possible SH 04 AC SH 05, LS 02K, C-130-XX XX0 15,30 DC LS 05 ( pole) C-133-XX XX0 21,10 AC SH 5 C-650-XX XX0 20,20 DC C-660-XX XX0 43,20 AC SH 4, SH 8,LS 4 - LS 17 AC-coil XX0 20,20 DC DC-coil XX0 41,60 AC SH 10 AC-coil XX0 20,20 DC DC-coil XX0 41,60 Type-/ E-No. end digit -XX0 see table on page F 31 Relays in Ü-version and coupling relays (Interface) no coil exchange possible. F 31

108 F Contactors Auxiliary contactors Accessories contactors, Spare coils E-No. voltage suffix XX0 for control relays type SH 05 and type-/ E-No. suffix for spare coils AC-operation suffix -8C E K P Hz [V] Hz [V] AC-operation suffix C -68-5D Double frequency coil 50/60 Hz [V] DC-operation suffix -1A -1B -00-1C -1D -1E F -18-1G J -20 (Maximum coil voltage m m m m m m m m m only 250V/DC) DC [V] Ordering example for spare coils: Spare coil for type SH 05 e.g. 24V 50Hz type C , E-No Price increase: For spare coils from table with designation»m«a price increase has to be considered. E-No. voltage suffix XX0 for control relays type SH 5 and type-/ E-No. suffix for spare coils AC-operation suffix -8C E K -69-8M P S 50 Hz [V] Hz [V] AC-operation suffix C -68-5D Double frequency coil 50/60 Hz [V] DC-operation suffix -1A -1B -00-1C -1D -1E F -18-1G H -1J -20-1K m m m m m m m m m m m DC [V] Ordering example for spare coils: Spare coil for type SH 5 e.g. 24V 50Hz type C , E-No Price increase: For spare coils from table with designation»m«a price increase has to be considered. E-No. voltage suffix XX0 for control relays type SH 04, SH 4, SH 8, SH 10 and spare coils (type SH 4 no coil exchange possible) AC-operation suffix -8C F H -8K ) ) ) 50 Hz [V] Hz [V] AC-operation suffix A B -7C -7D -79-7E F ) ) ) m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m 0.75 U S -coil 50 Hz [V] Hz [V] AC-operation suffix D E Double frequency coil 50/60 Hz [V] DC-operation suffix ) DC [V] Ordering example for spare coils: Spare coil for type SH 4 e.g.coil 24V 50Hz E-No Price increase: For spare coils from table with designation»m«a price increase has to be considered. 1) SH 04 not for voltages above AC 440V resp. DC 180V Remark: Use suffix only with E-No. of the basic execution, e.g. suffix for DC only with contactors with DC-coil on the lable of the contactors, you will find the suffix according to above table, e.g. 24 V, 50 Hz = suffix -85. On invoices / order confirmations etc. from our system, the suffix has 3 digits, end digit = 0, e.g. suffix is F 32

109 Contactors Heavy current contactor F Bar contactors type CH, double bar contactors type CD AC operation 230V 50/60Hz via built-in rectifier combined with economy resistors 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole Rated Designation Packing E-No. E-No. E-No. E-No. current [A] units Version A up to AC 500V, DC 220V per pole with blow out coils Bar contactors type CH 500 CH , CH , CH , CH , CH , CH , CH , CH , CH ,00 Double bar contactors type CD 2400 CD , CD , CD , CD , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,00 Version C Version 1000V up to AC 750V, DC 330V per pole with blow out coils Bar contactors type CH 500 CH , CH , CH , CH , CH , CH , CH , CH , CH ,00 Double bar contactors type CD 2400 CD , CD , CD , CD ,00 up to AC 1000V, DC 600V per pole with blow out coils Bar contactors type CH 500 CH , CH , CH , CH , CH , CH , CH , CH , CH ,00 Double bar contactors type CD 2400 CD , CD , CD , CD , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,00 Accessories E-No. end digits -990 (instead of -000): Contactor, version, voltage, frequency and accessories to be ordered with text. CH , I - IV-pole CH 2500, III-pole CD CH 2500, I +II-pole I - IV-pole Mechanical interlock of 2 contactors, special execution on request add. price add. price add. price Contactors without blow-out coil special version on request on request on request on request Operating voltages 1) AC V 50/60 Hz 1 ) add. price add. price add. price DC V 1 ) less price 2 ) add. price add. price Add. auxiliary switches Support for max. 8 auxiliary switches add. price add. price add. price arranged above magnet system 1 auxiliary switche (variable 1NO or 1NC) add. price add. price add. price Tropical design not available for execution A for execution C and 1000 V +10% +10% +10% 1) When ordering state voltage/ frequency. At DC < 110 V (partly possible), > 220 V on request. 2) Less price for DC operation F 33

110 F Soft starters Static soft starters Series SOL Current rating Ir Max. starting current Designation Packing E-no unit SOL M Digital version - IP20 Cooling: natural convection V 5 25 SOLM2K1B SOLM2K1D SOLM2K1F SOLM2K1G SOLM2K1H SOLM2K1I V 5 25 SOLM2K2B SOLM2K2D SOLM2K2F SOLM2K2G SOLM2K2H SOLM2K2I * Higher ratings of soft starters on request! Please contact us. F 34

111 Soft Notes starters F F 35

112 this is a blanc page

113 Overload relays / Thermistor protection G Overload relays Thermistor protection Thermal overload relays G 2 - G 8 Tripping units G 9 G 1

114 G Overload relays Thermal overload relays For LS...K-contactors 3-pole Fits to contactors Adjusting ranges Designation Packing E-No. type... of relays [A] units b 18K aux. contacts 1NO 1NC Basic version to couple with contactor Separate mounting part see page G 4 LS 4K (3-pole) LS 5K (3+4-pole) LS 7K (3+4-pole) LS 11K (3-pole) LS 15K (3-pole) LS 18K (3-pole) b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K , b 18K ,00 b 55K aux. contacts 1NO 1NC Basic version to couple with contactor Separate mounting part see page G 4 LS 22K (3-pole) LS 30K (3-pole) LS 37K (3-pole) LS 45K (3-pole) LS 55K (3-pole) b 55K , b 55K , b 55K , b 55K , b 55K , b 55K , b 55K , b 55K , b 55K , b 55K ,00 b 90K aux. contacts 1NO 1NC Basic version to couple with contactor No additional parts for sep. mounting with screws LS 75K (3-pole) LS 90K (3-pole) b 90K , b 90K , b 90K , b 90K , b 90K ,00 b 160K aux. contacts 1NO 1NC For separate mounting with screws Connecting parts to couple with contactor see page G 4 LS 110K (3-pole) b 160K ,00 LS 132K (3-pole) b 160K ,00 LS 160K (3-pole) b 160K ,00 b 375K aux. contacts 1NO 1NC For separate mounting with screws, basic version with ct's Connecting parts to couple with contactor see page G 4 LS 220K (3-pole) LS 280K (3-pole) LS 375K (3-pole) b 375K , b 375K , b 375K , b 375K , b 375K ,00 b 450K aux. contacts 1NO 1NC Kit consisting of 3 ct's and separate overload relay (Frame size as type b 18k for separate mounting) sep. mounting b 450K ,00 Other overload relays for LS...K and LS-contactors see page G 6. Overload relays type b 05 see page G 5 G 2

115 Overload relays Thermal overload relays G CT overload relays for heavy duty 3-pole, sep. mounting, aux. contacts 1NO 1NC Tripping CLASS 30, (Tripping time 9s < TP 30s at 7,2 x IE from cold state) Adjusting ranges Designation Packing E-No. of relays [A] units bw 55K Screw terminals bw 55K , bw 55K , bw 55K , bw 55K , bw 55K , bw 55K , bw 55K , bw 55K , bw 55K , bw 55K , bw 55K , bw 55K ,00 bw 160K Screw terminals, connecting parts to couple to contactor see page G bw 160K , bw 160K , bw 160K ,00 bw 375K Screw terminals, connecting parts to couple to contactor see page G bw 375K , bw 375K , bw 375K , bw 375K , bw 375K ,00 bw 450K Kit consisting of 3 ct's and separate overload relay bw 450K ,00 Heavy duty type bw-, see page G 9 G 3

116 G Overload relays Thermal overload relays Accessories for type b...k and bw...k Usable for device Designation Packing E-No. type... units Separate mounting parts for sep. mounting b 18K, b 55K for snap-on mounting on rails DIN EN b 18K b 55K VST 18K VST 55K Connecting parts (E-No. = 1 set) for b 160K, bw 160K for connection between overload relays and contactors LS 110K - LS 160K AT 160K for b 375K, bw 375K for connection between overload relays and contactors LS 220K, LS 280K LS 375K AT 280K AT 375K Finger proof cover Later mounting on b 90K, Finger proof according to DIN 0106 Part 100 Type KLA 90K3 to cover the main terminals between contactor and overload relays. (For other terminals type KLA 90K) b 90K with contactor KLA 90K Remote operation with bowden cable with front element ø 22.5mm for door and cover mounting b 18K - b 450K, bw 55K - bw 450K FRSbK FRLbK Cover for setting scale b 18K - b 450K, bw 55K - bw 450K EAbK ,45 Remote-RESET element, electrical for b 18K - b 450K and bw 55K - bw 450K for later mounting on overload relays b...k, bw...k Voltage operating limits Us, power consumption AC 100VA, DC 100W Control voltage Us for AC 50/60Hz and DC: 12 RRbK A0 49,50 24 RRbK ,50 48 RRbK , RRbK , RRbK , RRbK , RRbK ,50 ON-time t 1 OFF-time t 2 1s 5s 10s 30s 90s 180s E1min = 0.2s not for continuous operating duty G 4

117 Overload relays Thermal overload relays G For compact contactors 3-pole Fits to contactors Adjusting ranges Designation Packing E-No. Typ... of relays [A] units b 05 aux. contacts 1NC Screw terminals LS 02K, LS 07, LS 05 (3+4-pole) b , b , b , b , b , b , b , b , b , b , b , b , b , b , b ,30 with terminal repeater 14/22 (only for one conductor) with conductor A2-96 without A2-96 (without connection for A2), auxiliary contacts 95/96 connected separately: Order with E-No. suffix -010 instead -000 G 5

118 G Overload relays Thermal overload relays For LS...K- and LS-contactors Fits to contactors Adjusting ranges Designation Packing E-No. type... of relays [A] units b 27T aux. contacts 1NO 1NC with integrated A2-terminal (Coil connection) Screw terminals LS 4K (3-pole) LS 5K ( pole) LS 7K ( pole) LS 11K (3- pole) LS 15K (3- pole) 1 ) LS 18K (3- pole) 1 ) LS 4, LS 7, LS 17 LS 27 LS 37 (3-pole) 2 ) 1) in case of load reduction, no additional fixing through adapter hook 2) in case of load reduction b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T , b 27T ,70 b 77S for LS-contactors aux. contacts 1NO 1NC Screw terminals, incl. connecting parts for mounting 3-pole LS b 77S , b 77S , b 77S , b 77S , b 77S , b 77S ,00 3-pole LS 47, LS 57, LS 77, LS b 77S , b 77S , b 77S , b 77S , b 77S , b 77S ,00 b 177S for LS-contactors aux. contacts 1NO 1NC Screw terminals, incl. connecting parts for mounting 3-pole LS 47, LS 57, LS 77, LS 87 (FL + RKB) b 177S , b 177S ,00 3-pole LS 107 (FL + RKB), LS 147 (FL + RKB), LS b 177S , b 177S , b 177S , b 177S , b 177S ,00 3-pole LS 107 Flat plug terminal, LS 147 Flat plug terminal, LS 177, LS b 177S ,00 G 6

119 Overload relays Thermal overload relays G Accessories Description Usable for devices Designation Packing E-No. type... units Adapter, screw mounting Sep. mounting, for combinations LS 07 with b Adapter, separate mounting b 05 For snap-on mounting on rails DIN EN (order also terminal block) b Terminal block, separate mounting b 05 For mounting to thermal overload relays b 05 for screw mounting b Add-on auxiliary switch, 1 NO cuontact Snap-on mounting, only in position»h«b 05 HB Separate mounting parts For snap-on mounting on rails DIN EN sep. mounting b 27T VST 27T sep. mounting b 77S VST 77S Connecting parts Only necessary, if the assembly with the relevant contactors is not possible with the included parts in the package of the overload relay. Plug-in connections for b 77S, E-No. = 1 set = 3 pieces LS 22K - LS 37K ,10 LS 15K - LS 18K ,45 for contactors without box type terminal LS ,75 for contactors with box type terminal LS 47 - LS ,50 Plug-in connections for b 177S, E-No. = 1 set = 3 pieces Take notice of the terminal covers LS 45K - LS 55K ,75 for contactors with box terminal LS 47 - LS ,85 for contactors with box terminal LS 107, LS 147, LS ,10 for mounting with box terminal RKB 2 b 177S sep. mounting ,10 Box type terminal Triple dual box type terminal, can be plugged to the load side of the TOR b 177S usable only up to and incl. current ranges A b 177S RKB If a separate mounted b 177S is used, with box type terminal on both sides, order : - 2 x box type terminal x connecting parts x finger proof cover (only if a protection is needed acc. DIN VDE 0106 Part 100) G 7

120 G Overload relays Thermal overload relays Accessories Finger proof cover Description Usable for devices Designation Packing E-No. type... units Later mounting on b 177 S Covering the input and output side KLAB 177A Covering the contactor side 177S with contactor KLAB 177B (Use finger proof cover for the lead side of the therminal overload relay b 177S with box terminal block RKB 2 E-No Auxiliary terminals: Main terminals: for Types b 05, b 27T, b 77S, b 177S, bw 17S - bw 320S not necessary for Types b 05, b 27T, b 77S not necessary Remote operation Bowden cable anchor, with thread M4 for the connection of bowden cable operators delivery without bowden cable (on request) BZA b 27T, b 77S, b177s, bw...s, be 627e, b721sw Label Can be written by a waterproof pen pluggable in covers Z-Nr R01 LS...-contactor, b 27T, b 77S, KZS b 177S, bw...s, be 627, b721sw A2-module Screw terminal With terminal screw M3 up to 2 x 2.5mm 2 and connecting wire from the coil terminal»a2«. Improved accessibility to»a2«in the combination of the overload relay with the contactor. LS 07, LS 4-37, b 77S A2-module LA2-module As A2-module, but additional light indicates for signalling of switch states. (Terminal screw and 2 connecting wire) with glow lamp, V AC LS 07, LS 4-37, LA2-module b 27T, b 77S, b 177S with 2 antiparallel LED s, 17-33V AC/DC LS 07, LS 4-37, LA2-module b 27T, b 77S, b 177S G 8

121 Thermistor protection G Tripping units Type MSS Type MSN Description Rated voltage Us Designation Packing E-No. min. - max. units Tripping units 22.5mm 1 changeover 1-6 temperature gauges connectable AC V MSS Version ,00 AC 24V MSS Version ,00 UC 24V MSS Version ,00 AC V MSS Version ,00 2 changeover, reset for store, remote reset Storage, disconnectable AC V MSS Version ,00 AC 24V MSS Version ,00 AC V MSS Version ,00 Tripping units 45mm 2 changeover, reset for store, short-circuit protection, remote reset 1-6 temperature gauges connectable AC V MSN Version ,00 AC 24V MSN Version ,00 AC 42-48V MSN Version ,00 AC V MSN Version ,00 AC V MSN Version ,00 AC V MSN Version ,00 2 changeover, reset for store, test key, N-storage, short-circuit protection, remote reset Storage also in case of a power loss. AC V MSS Version ,00 AC 24V MSS Version ,00 AC 42-48V MSS Version ,00 AC V MSS Version ,00 AC V MSS Version ,00 Accessories Cover, sealable für MSS AB MSS ,40 für MSN AB MSN ,60 Adapter for screw mounting für MSS AD MSS ,51 für MSN AD MSN ,61 G 9

122 G Notes G 10

123 Time relays / Control and signalling units H Time relays Control and signalling units Relays and flash transmitters H 2 - H 4 Accessories H 4 Operators 22 mm H 5 - H 14 Contact blocks and power supplies H 15 - H 16 Push-button enclosures H 17 Accessories H 18 - H 23 H 1

124 H Time relays Range E, Range S Time ranges Supply Designation Packing E-No. voltage [Us] units Single function relay delayed pick-up Range E: Relay, 1CO s UC 24 V, AC V ERE s UC 24 V, AC V ERE min UC 24 V, AC V ERE s UC 24 V, AC V ERE Range E: Thyristor s UC V EKE s UC V EKE s UC V EKE Range S: 1CO 0.05s - 300h UC 24 V, AC V ERS s - 300h DC 12-60V, AC 12-40V ERS Range S: Potentiometer, 1CO, control contact 0.05s - 300h DC 24 V, 42-48V, AC V ERS Range S: Potentiometer, 2CO, 0.05s - 300h UC 24 V, 42-48V, AC V ERS s - 300h DC 12-60V, AC 12-40V ERS Single function relay delayed drop-off Range E: Relay, 1CO (with auxiliary voltage) s AC V AHE s UC 24V AHE s AC V AHE s UC 24V AHE s AC V AHE s UC 24V AHE Range E: Relay, 1CO (without auxiliary voltage) s UC 24V, AC V ARE s UC 24V, AC V ARE Range E: Thyristor (with auxiliary voltage) s UC V AKE s UC V AKE s UC V AKE Range S: 1CO (without auxiliary voltage) 0.05s - 10min UC V ARS Range S: Potentiometer, 2CO (without auxiliary voltage) 0.05s - 10min UC V ARS Range S: Potentiometer, control contact, 1CO (with auxiliary voltage) 0.05s - 300h UC 24 V, 42-48V, AC V AHS Range S: control contact, 2CO (with auxiliary voltage) 0.05s - 300h UC 24 V, 42-48V, AC V AHS H 2

125 Time relays H Range E, Range S Time ranges Supply Designation Packing E-No. voltage [Us] units Multi-function relay Range E: Thyristor output, solid-state s reset to 3-300s UC V MKE Range S: Potentiometer, control contact, 1CO 0.05s - 300h UC 24V, 42-48V, AC V MBS s - 300h DC 12-60V, AC 12-40V MBS Multi-function star-delta relay Range S: with star delta change-over, 2CO 0.05s - 300h UC 12-60V, AC 12-40V MBS s - 300h DC 24V, AC V MBS as MBS: with star delta change-over, 2CO 0.05s - 300h UC V MFS Star-delta relay Range E: Relay, transit time 30ms, 1CO s UC 24V, AC V SDE Range S: Relay, transit time 50ms, 1 double CO 0.05s - 300h UC 24V, 42-48V, AC V YDEW Range S: Relay, transit time 50ms, 1CO 0.05s - 300h UC 24V, AC V YDAV Range S: Relay, transit time 50ms, 2 NO 0.05s - 300h AC V YDEW s - 300h UC 24V YDEW Range S: Relay, transit time 50ms, 2CO 0.05s - 300h UC 24V, 42-48V, AC V YDAV Flash transmitter Range E: Starting with pause, 1CO s UC 24V, AC V EBE Range S: Starting with pause, 1CO 0.05s - 300h UC 24V, AC V EBS Range S: Starting with pause, potentiometer, 2CO 0.05s - 300h UC 24V, 42-48V, AC V EBS H 3

126 H Time relays Range E, Range S Time range Supply Designation Packing E-No. voltage [Us] units Momentary contact relay Range E: Contact on opening, 1CO (without auxiliary voltage) s AC V AWE s UC 24V AWE Range E: Contact on closing, 1CO s UC 24V, AC V VWE s AC V VWE s UC 24V, AC V VWE Range S: Contact on opening, control contact, 2CO 0.05s - 300h UC 24V, 42-48V, AC V AWS Range S: Contact on closing, 1CO 0.05s - 300h UC 24V, AC V VWS Range S: Contact on closing, potentiometer, 2CO 0.05s - 300h UC 24V, 42-48V, AC V VWS Switching relay Range E: Pick-up, drop-off time approx. 10ms, 1CO AC V IRE UC 24V IRE Accessories Adapter for screw fixing Remote potentiometer 50kΩ 10.5mm mm mm Range S: Sealable cover H 4

127 Control and signalling units H Operators 22 mm Thermoplastic square, satin black Thermoplastic round, satin black Metal round, satin chrome Colour Packing Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. units Push-button incl. flange for 3 contact blocks with flush cap black 1 BSDGS ,38 red 1 BSDGR ,38 green 1 BSDGG ,38 yellow 1 BSDGY ,38 blue 1 BSDGB ,38 white 1 BSDGW ,38 no cap cover 1 BSDGO ,87 BFDGS ,87 BFDGR ,87 BFDGG ,87 BFDGY ,87 BFDGB ,87 BFDGW ,87 BFDGO ,30 BMDGS ,38 BMDGR ,38 BMDGG ,38 BMDGY ,38 BMDGB ,38 BMDGW ,38 BMDGO ,87 with raised cap black 1 BSDSS ,69 red 1 BSDSR ,69 green 1 BSDSG ,69 yellow 1 BSDSY ,69 blue 1 BSDSB ,69 white 1 BSDSW ,69 no cap cover 1 BSDSO ,18 BFDSS ,48 BFDSR ,48 BFDSG ,48 BFDSY ,48 BFDSB ,48 BFDSW ,48 BFDSO ,97 BMDSS ,69 BMDSR ,69 BMDSG ,69 BMDSY ,69 BMDSB ,69 BMDSW ,69 BMDSO ,18 with recessed cap black 1 red 1 green 1 yellow 1 blue 1 white 1 no cap cover 1 BMDES ,69 BMDER ,69 BMDEG ,69 BMDEY ,69 BMDEB ,69 BMDEW ,69 BMDEO ,18 Push-button without flange for base mounting contact blocks with flush cap black 1 red 1 green 1 yellow 1 blue 1 white 1 BYDGS ,02 BYDGR ,02 BYDGG ,02 BYDGY ,02 BYDGB ,02 BYDGW ,02 with raised cap black 1 red 1 green 1 yellow 1 blue 1 white 1 BYDSS ,15 BYDSR ,15 BYDSG ,15 BYDSY ,15 BYDSB ,15 BYDSW ,15 Illuminated push-button incl. flange for 1 contact block and 1 bulb power supply with flush cap red 1 BSLGR ,87 green 1 BSLGG ,87 yellow 1 BSLGY ,87 blue 1 BSLGB ,87 white 1 BSLGW ,87 transparent 1 BSLGC ,87 BFLGR ,69 BFLGG ,69 BFLGY ,69 BFLGB ,69 BFLGW ,69 BFLGC ,69 BMLGR ,87 BMLGG ,87 BMLGY ,87 BMLGB ,87 BMLGW ,87 BMLGC ,87 with raised cap red 1 BSLGR ,97 green 1 BSLGG ,97 yellow 1 BSLGY ,97 blue 1 BSLGB ,97 white 1 BSLGW ,97 transparent 1 BSLGC ,97 BFLSR ,10 BFLSG ,10 BFLSY ,10 BFLSB ,10 BFLSW ,10 BFLSC ,10 BMLSR ,97 BMLSG ,97 BMLSY ,97 BMLSB ,97 BMLSW ,97 BMLSC ,97 with recessed cap red 1 BSLGR ,50 green 1 BSLGG ,50 yellow 1 BSLGY ,50 blue 1 BSLGB ,50 white 1 BSLGW ,50 transparent 1 BSLGC ,50 BFLER ,48 BFLEG ,48 BFLEY ,48 BFLEB ,48 BFLEW ,48 BFLEC ,48 BMLER ,03 BMLEG ,03 BMLEY ,50 BMLEB ,50 BMLEW ,50 BMLEC ,50 H 5

128 H Control and signalling units Operators 22 mm Thermoplastic, square, satin black Thermoplastic, round, satin black Metal, round, satin chrome colour Packing Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. units Mushroom push-button incl. flange for 2 contact blocks Mushroom head diam. 28 mm black 1 red 1 green 1 yellow 1 BFP3S ,02 BFP3R ,02 BFP3G ,02 BFP3Y ,02 BMP3S ,40 BMP3R ,40 BMP3G ,40 BMP3Y ,40 Mushroom head diam. 40 mm black 1 red 1 green 1 yellow 1 BFP4S ,23 BFP4R ,23 BFP4G ,23 BFP4Y ,23 BMP4S ,40 BMP4R ,40 BMP4G ,40 BMP4Y ,40 Mushroom head diam. 60 mm black 1 red 1 green 1 yellow 1 BFP5S ,50 BFP5R ,50 BFP5G ,50 BFP5Y ,50 BMP5S ,50 BMP5R ,50 BMP5G ,50 BMP5Y ,50 Mushroom head surface area 30 x 30mm black 1 BSP3S ,40 red 1 BSP3R ,40 green 1 BSP3G ,40 yellow 1 BSP3Y ,40 Mushroom push-button without flange for base mounting contact blocks Mushroom head diam. 40 mm red 1 BYP4R ,50 Illuminated mushroom push-button incl. flange for 1 contact block and 1 bulb power supply red 1 BSLPR ,10 green 1 BSLPG ,10 yellow 1 BSLPY ,10 blue 1 BSLPB ,10 white 1 BSLPW ,10 transparent 1 BSLPC ,10 BFLPR ,50 BFLPG ,50 BFLPY ,50 BFLPB ,50 BFLPW ,50 BFLPC ,50 BMLPR ,10 BMLPG ,10 BMLPY ,10 BMLPB ,10 BMLPW ,10 BMLPC ,10 H 6

129 Control and signalling units H Operators 22 mm Thermoplastic, square, satin black Thermoplastic, round, satin black Metal, round, satin chrome Colour Packing Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. units Mushroom control incl. flange for 2 contact blocks, mushroom head diam. 40 mm push-twist to release red 1 BFPRN ,90 BMPRN ,30 push-pull to release red 1 BSPRN ,30 without flange for base mounting contact blocks push-twist to release red 1 BYPRN ,70 Mushroom control - Emergency OFF push-twist to release red 1 BSPRA ,70 BFPRA ,80 incl. flange for 2 contact blocks, positive break, mushroom head diam. 40 mm push-key to release red 1 BSPRS ,40 BFPRS ,70 BMPRS ,40 Mushroom control/ push-button with 3 switching positions 0 fixed, 1-2 transient red 1 BSP2T ,70 BFP2T ,30 BMP2T ,70 incl. flange for 2 contact blocks, mushroom head diam. 40 mm 1-0 fixed, 2 transient red 1 BSP1T ,70 BFP1T ,30 BMP1T ,70 Illuminated mushroom control/ push-button with 3 switching positions incl. flange for 2 contact blocks and bulb power supply, mushroom head diam. 40 mm 1-0 fixed, 2 transient red 1 BS2PR ,40 green 1 BS2PG ,40 yellow 1 BS2PY ,40 blue 1 BS2PB ,40 white 1 BS2PW ,40 transparent 1 BS2PC , fixed, 0 transient red 1 BS3PR ,40 green 1 BS3PG ,40 yellow 1 BS3PY ,40 blue 1 BS3PB ,40 white 1 BS3PW ,40 transparent 1 BS3PC ,40 BF2PR ,90 BF2PG ,90 BF2PY ,90 BF2PB ,90 BF2PW ,90 BF2PC ,90 BF3PR ,90 BF3PG ,90 BF3PY ,90 BF3PB ,90 BF3PW ,90 BF3PC ,90 BM2PR ,40 BM2PG ,40 BM2PY ,40 BM2PB ,40 BM2PW ,40 BM2PC ,40 BM3PR ,40 BM3PG ,40 BM3PY ,40 BM3PB ,40 BM3PW ,40 BM3PC ,40 H 7

130 H Control and signalling units Operators 22 mm Thermoplastic square, satin black Thermoplastic round, satin black Metal round, satin chrome Colour Packing Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. units Selector switch with lever incl. flange for 2 contact blocks, long lever 2 positions, fixed black 1 BFK1L ,20 BMK1L ,60 3 positions, fixed black 1 BFK3L ,60 BMK3L ,90 4 positions, fixed black 1 BFK7L ,20 BMK7L ,70 5 positions, fixed black 1 BFK9L ,20 BMK9L ,70 Selector switch/ push-button with lever 2 positions, left fixed - right transient black 1 3 positions, left transient - middle and right fixed black 1 BFK2L ,40 BFK4L ,60 BMK2L ,50 BMK4L ,80 3 positions, left and right transient - middle fixed black 1 BFK6L ,60 BMK6L ,60 3 positions, right transient - middle and left fixed black 1 BFK5L ,60 BMK5L ,80 4 positions, 1, 2, 3 fixed - 4 transient black 1 BFK8L ,90 BMK8L ,40 Selector switch with lever incl. flange for 2 contact blocks, short lever 2 positions, fixed, V position black 1 BSK1S ,30 red 1 BSK1R ,30 green 1 BSK1G ,30 yellow 1 BSK1Y ,30 blue 1 BSK1B ,30 BFK1S ,40 BFK1R ,40 BFK1G ,40 BFK1Y ,40 BFK1B ,40 BMK1S ,30 BMK1R ,30 BMK1G ,30 BMK1Y ,30 BMK1B ,30 3 positions, fixed black 1 BSK3S ,60 red 1 BSK3R ,60 green 1 BSK3G ,60 yellow 1 BSK3Y ,60 blue 1 BSK3B ,60 BFK3S ,70 BFK3R ,70 BFK3G ,70 BFK3Y ,70 BFK3B ,70 BMK3S ,60 BMK3R ,60 BMK3G ,60 BMK3Y ,60 BMK3B ,60 4 positions, fixed black 1 BSK7S ,40 red 1 BSK7R ,40 green 1 BSK7G ,40 yellow 1 BSK7Y ,40 blue 1 BSK7B ,40 BFK7S ,20 BFK7R ,20 BFK7G ,20 BFK7Y ,20 BFK7B ,20 BMK7S ,40 BMK7R ,40 BMK7G ,40 BMK7Y ,40 BMK7B ,40 5 positions, fixed black 1 BSK8S ,40 red 1 BSK8R ,40 green 1 BSK8G ,40 yellow 1 BSK8Y ,40 blue 1 BSK8B ,40 BFK8S ,20 BFK8R ,20 BFK8G ,20 BFK8Y ,20 BFK8B ,20 BMK8S ,40 BMK8R ,40 BMK8G ,40 BMK8Y ,40 BMK8B ,40 H 8

131 Control and signalling units H Operators 22 mm Thermoplastic square, satin black Thermoplastic round, satin black Metal round, satin chrome Colour Packing Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. units Selector switch with 2 positions, fixed black 1 BYK1S ,90 lever, without flange for base mounting contact blocks, short lever 3 positions, fixed black 1 BYK3S ,30 Selector switch/ push-button with lever incl. flange for 2 contact blocks, short lever 2 positions, right transient black 1 BSK2S ,20 red 1 BSK2R ,20 green 1 BSK2G ,20 yellow 1 BSK2Y ,20 blue 1 BSK2B ,20 BFK2S ,90 BFK2R ,90 BFK2G ,90 BFK2Y ,90 BFK2B ,90 BMK2S ,20 BMK2R ,20 BMK2G ,20 BMK2Y ,20 BMK2B ,20 3 positions, middle fixed - left and right transient black 1 BSK6S ,50 red 1 BSK6R ,50 green 1 BSK6G ,50 yellow 1 BSK6Y ,50 blue 1 BSK6B ,50 BFK6S ,90 BFK6R ,90 BFK6G ,90 BFK6Y ,90 BFK6B ,90 BMK6S ,50 BMK6R ,50 BMK6G ,50 BMK6Y ,50 BMK6B ,50 3 positions, middle and left fixed - right transient black 1 BSK5S ,50 red 1 BSK5R ,50 green 1 BSK5G ,50 yellow 1 BSK5Y ,50 blue 1 BSK5B ,50 BFK5S ,90 BFK5R ,90 BFK5G ,90 BFK5Y ,90 BFK5B ,90 BMK5S ,50 BMK5R ,50 BMK5G ,50 BMK5Y ,50 BMK5B ,50 3 positions, middle and right fixed - left transient black 1 BSK4S ,50 red 1 BSK4R ,50 green 1 BSK4G ,50 yellow 1 BSK4Y ,50 blue 1 BSK4B ,50 BFK4S ,90 BFK4R ,90 BFK4G ,90 BFK4Y ,90 BFK4B ,90 BMK4S ,50 BMK4R ,50 BMK4G ,50 BMK4Y ,50 BMK4B ,50 Selector switch with 3 positions, fixed black 1 BYK6S ,90 lever, without flange for base mounting contact blocks, short lever Illuminated selector switch/ push-button with lever incl. flange for 1 contact block and 1 bulb power supply, short lever 2 positions, fixed red 1 BSL2R ,50 green 1 BSL2G ,50 yellow 1 BSL2Y ,50 blue 1 BSL2B ,50 white 1 BSL2W ,50 transparent 1 BSL2C ,50 BFL2R ,20 BFL2G ,20 BFL2Y ,20 BFL2B ,20 BFL2W ,20 BFL2C ,20 BML2R ,50 BML2G ,50 BML2Y ,50 BML2B ,50 BML2W ,50 BML2C ,50 3 positions, fixed red 1 BSL3R ,10 green 1 BSL3G ,10 gryellowün 1 BSL3Y ,10 blue 1 BSL3B ,10 white 1 BSL3W ,10 transparent 1 BSL3C ,10 BFL3R ,70 BFL3G ,70 BFL3Y ,70 BFL3B ,70 BFL3W ,70 BFL3C ,70 BML3R ,10 BML3G ,10 BML3Y ,10 BML3B ,10 BML3W ,10 BML3C ,10 3 positions, middle and right fixed - left transient transparent 1 BFL4C ,10 H 9

132 H Control and signalling units Operators 22 mm Thermoplastic square, satin black Thermoplastic round, satin black Metal round, satin chrome Colour Packing Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. units Push-button with key lock incl. flange for 2 contact blocks, Key version 95 Key removable in left and right positions, lockable in normal position black 1 BFD1S ,40 Key removable in left and right positions, lockable in both positions black 1 BFD3S ,40 BMD1S ,20 BMD3S ,20 Key removable in left and right positions, lockable in depressed position black 1 BFD2S ,40 BMD2S ,20 Key removable in right position, lockable in normal position black 1 BFD4S ,40 BMD4S ,20 Key removable in right position, lockable in both positions black 1 BFD6S ,40 BMD6S ,20 Key removable in right position, lockable in depressed position black 1 BFD5S ,40 BMD5S ,20 Selector switch with key, 2 positions, fixed incl. flange for 2 contact blocks, Switching angle 90 Key removable in both positions Key version 95 1 BSS0K ,50 Key version 01 1 BSS1K ,80 Key version 02 1 BSS2K ,80 Key version 03 1 BSS3K ,80 Key version 04 1 BSS4K ,80 Key version 05 1 BSS5K ,80 Key version 10 1 BSS6K ,80 Key version 16 1 BSS7K ,80 Key version 19 1 BSS8K ,80 BFS0K ,50 BFS1K ,90 BFS2K ,90 BFS3K ,90 BFS4K ,90 BFS5K ,90 BFS6K ,90 BFS7K ,90 BFS8K ,90 BMS0K ,50 BMS1K ,80 BMS2K ,80 BMS3K ,80 BMS4K ,80 BMS5K ,80 BMS6K ,80 BMS7K ,80 BMS8K ,80 Key removable in left position Key version 95 1 BSS0A ,50 Key version 01 1 BSS1A ,80 Key version 02 1 BSS2A ,80 Key version 03 1 BSS3A ,80 Key version 04 1 BSS4A ,80 Key version 05 1 BSS5A ,80 Key version 10 1 BSS6A ,80 Key version 16 1 BSS7A ,80 Key version 19 1 BSS8A ,80 BFS0A ,50 BFS1A ,90 BFS2A ,90 BFS3A ,90 BFS4A ,90 BFS5A ,90 BFS6A ,90 BFS7A ,90 BFS8A ,90 BMS0A ,50 BMS1A ,80 BMS2A ,80 BMS3A ,80 BMS4A ,80 BMS5A ,80 BMS6A ,80 BMS7A ,80 BMS8A ,80 Key removable in right position Key version 95 1 BSS0E ,50 Key version 01 1 BSS1E ,80 Key version 02 1 BSS2E ,80 Key version 03 1 BSS3E ,80 Key version 04 1 BSS4E ,80 Key version 05 1 BSS5E ,80 Key version 10 1 BSS6E ,80 Key version 16 1 BSS7E ,80 Key version 19 1 BSS8E ,80 BFS0E ,50 BFS1E ,90 BFS2E ,90 BFS3E ,90 BFS4E ,90 BFS5E ,90 BFS6E ,90 BFS7E ,90 BFS8E ,90 BMS0E ,50 BMS1E ,80 BMS2E ,80 BMS3E ,80 BMS4E ,80 BMS5E ,80 BMS6E ,80 BMS7E ,80 BMS8E ,80 Selector switch with key, 2 positions, fixed, without flange Key removable in left position Key version 95 1 BYS0A ,90 for base mounting contact blocks H 10

133 Control and signalling units H Operators 22 mm Thermoplastic square, satin black Thermoplastic round, satin black Metal round, satin chrome Colour Packing Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. units Push-button switch with key, 2 positions right transient, incl. flange for 2 contact blocks, 90 Key removable in left position Key version 95 1 BSS0T ,00 Key version 01 1 BSS1T ,40 Key version 02 1 BSS2T ,40 Key version 03 1 BSS3T ,40 Key version 04 1 BSS4T ,40 Key version 05 1 BSS5T ,40 BFS0T ,10 BFS1T ,30 BFS2T ,30 BFS3T ,30 BFS4T ,30 BFS5T ,30 BMS0T ,00 BMS1T ,40 BMS2T ,40 BMS3T ,40 BMS4T ,40 BMS5T ,40 Selector switch with key, 3 positions, fixed incl. flange for 2 contact blocks, 2 x 45 Key removable in left, middle and right positions Key version 95 1 BSS0M ,10 Key version 01 1 BSS1M ,70 Key version 02 1 BSS2M ,70 Key version 03 1 BSS3M ,70 Key version 04 1 BSS4M ,70 Key version 05 1 BSS5M ,70 BFS0M ,20 BFS1M ,70 BFS2M ,70 BFS3M ,70 BFS4M ,10 BFS5M ,10 BMS0M ,10 BMS1M ,70 BMS2M ,70 BMS3M ,70 BMS4M ,70 BMS5M ,70 Key removable in left and middle positions Key version 95 1 BSS0F ,10 Key version 01 1 BSS1F ,70 Key version 02 1 BSS2F ,70 Key version 03 1 BSS3F ,70 Key version 04 1 BSS4F ,70 Key version 05 1 BSS5F ,70 BFS0F ,20 BFS1F ,70 BFS2F ,70 BFS3F ,70 BFS4F ,10 BFS5F ,10 BMS0F ,10 BMS1F ,70 BMS2F ,70 BMS3F ,70 BMS4F ,70 BMS5F ,70 Key removable in left and right positions Key version 95 1 BSS0G ,10 Key version 01 1 BSS1G ,70 Key version 02 1 BSS2G ,70 Key version 03 1 BSS3G ,70 Key version 04 1 BSS4G ,70 Key version 05 1 BSS5G ,70 BFS0G ,20 BFS1G ,70 BFS2G ,70 BFS3G ,70 BFS4G ,10 BFS5G ,10 BMS0G ,10 BMS1G ,70 BMS2G ,70 BMS3G ,70 BMS4G ,70 BMS5G ,70 Key removable in left position Key version 95 1 BSS0B ,10 Key version 01 1 BSS1B ,70 Key version 02 1 BSS2B ,70 Key version 03 1 BSS3B ,70 Key version 04 1 BSS4B ,70 Key version 05 1 BSS5B ,70 BFS0B ,20 BFS1B ,70 BFS2B ,70 BFS3B ,70 BFS4B ,10 BFS5B ,10 BMS0B ,10 BMS1B ,70 BMS2B ,70 BMS3B ,70 BMS4B ,70 BMS5B ,70 Key removable in middle and right positions Key version 95 1 BSS0H ,10 Key version 01 1 BSS1H ,70 Key version 02 1 BSS2H ,70 Key version 03 1 BSS3H ,70 Key version 04 1 BSS4H ,70 Key version 05 1 BSS5H ,70 BFS0H ,20 BFS1H ,70 BFS2H ,70 BFS3H ,70 BFS4H ,10 BFS5H ,10 BMS0H ,10 BMS1H ,70 BMS2H ,70 BMS3H ,70 BMS4H ,70 BMS5H ,70 Key removable in middle position Key version 95 1 BSS0C ,10 Key version 01 1 BSS1C ,70 Key version 02 1 BSS2C ,70 Key version 03 1 BSS3C ,70 Key version 04 1 BSS4C ,70 Key version 05 1 BSS5C ,70 BFS0C ,20 BFS1C ,70 BFS2C ,70 BFS3C ,70 BFS4C ,10 BFS5C ,10 BMS0C ,10 BMS1C ,70 BMS2C ,70 BMS4C ,70 BMS5C ,70 BMS3C ,70 Key removable in right position Key version 95 1 BSS0D ,10 Key version 01 1 BSS1D ,70 Key version 02 1 BSS2D ,70 Key version 03 1 BSS3D ,70 Key version 04 1 BSS4D ,70 Key version 05 1 BSS5D ,70 BFS0D ,20 BFS1D ,70 BFS2D ,70 BFS3D ,70 BFS4D ,10 BFS5D ,10 BMS0D ,10 BMS1D ,70 BMS2D ,70 BMS4D ,70 BMS5D ,70 BMS3D ,70 H 11

134 H Control and signalling units Operators 22 mm Thermoplastic square, satin black Thermoplastic round, satin black Metall, rund, matt, verchromt Colour Packing Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. units Selector switch with key, 3 positions, fixed without flange for base mounting contact blocks, 2 x 45 Key removable in left, middle and right positions Key version 95 1 BYZ4A ,40 Selector switch/ push-button, with key 3 positions incl. flange for 2 contact blocks, 2 x 45 left transient, middle and right fixed, key removable in middle and right positions Key version 95 1 BSS0S ,00 BFS0S ,50 Key version 01 1 BSS1S ,10 BFS1S ,70 left transient, middle and right fixed, key removable in middle position Key version 95 1 BSS0P ,00 BFS0P ,50 Key version 01 1 BSS1P ,10 BFS1P ,70 left transient, middle and right fixed, key removable in right position Key version 95 1 BSS0R ,00 BFS0R ,50 Key version 01 1 BSS1R ,10 BFS1R ,70 left and right transient, middle fixed, key removable in middle position Key version 95 1 BSS4R ,00 BFS4R ,50 Key version 01 1 BSS5R ,10 BFS5R ,70 right transient, middle and left fixed, key removable in middle and right positions Key version 95 1 BSS2S ,00 BFS2S ,50 Key version 01 1 BSS3S ,10 BFS3S ,70 right transient, middle and left fixed, key removable in middle position Key version 95 1 BSS2P ,00 BFS2P ,50 Key version 01 1 BSS3P ,10 BFS3P ,70 right transient, middle and left fixed, key removable in right position Key version 95 1 BSS2R ,00 BFS2R ,50 Key version 01 1 BSS3R ,10 BFS3R ,70 BMS0S ,00 BMS1S ,10 BMS0P ,00 BMS1P ,10 BMS0R ,00 BMS1R ,10 BMS4R ,00 BMS5R ,10 BMS2S ,00 BMS3S ,10 BMS2P ,00 BMS3P ,10 BMS2R ,00 BMS3R ,10 Selector switch/ push-button, with key 3 positions for base mounting contact blocks Key removable in left, middle and right positions Key version 95 1 BYS4A ,10 Selector switch with key, 4 positions, fixed incl. flange for contact blocks, Key version 95, 3 x 40 Key removable in positions (see left) 1 1 BSS1V , BSS2V , BSS3V , BSS4V ,30 1 and 2 1 BSS5V ,30 1 and 3 1 BSS6V ,30 1 and 4 1 BSS7V ,30 2 and 3 1 BSS8V ,30 2 and 4 1 BSS9V ,30 3 and 4 1 BSSAV ,30 1, 2 and 3 1 BSSBV ,30 1, 2 and 4 1 BSSCV ,30 1, 3 and 4 1 BSSDV ,30 2, 3 and 4 1 BSSEV ,30 1, 2, 3 and 4 1 BSSFV ,30 BFS1V ,30 BFS2V ,30 BFS3V ,30 BFS4V ,30 BFS5V ,30 BFS6V ,30 BFS7V ,30 BFS8V ,30 BFS9V ,30 BFSAV ,30 BFSBV ,30 BFSCV ,30 BFSDV ,30 BFSEV ,30 BFSFV ,30 BMS1V ,30 BMS2V ,30 BMS3V ,30 BMS4V ,30 BMS5V ,30 BMS6V ,30 BMS7V ,30 BMS8V ,30 BMS9V ,30 BMSAV ,30 BMSBV ,30 BMSCV ,30 BMSDV ,30 BMSEV ,30 BMSFV ,30 H 12

135 Control and signalling units H Operators 22 mm Thermoplastic square, satin black Thermoplastic round, satin black Metal round, satin chrome Colour Packing Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. units Toggle switch incl. flange for 2 contact blocks 2 positions, fixed black 1 BSXCD ,60 BFXCD ,10 BMXCD ,60 3 positions, fixed black 1 BSXCB ,30 BFXCB ,80 BMXCB ,30 Selector push-button switch incl. flange for 2 contact blocks 2 positions, fixed black 1 BMD2G ,80 3 positions, fixed black 1 BMD4G ,80 Joystick incl. flange for 2 contact blocks 3 positions, 1 transient, 0 and 3 fixed black 1 BFN2A ,90 BMN2TA ,10 3 positions, 1 and 3 transient, 0 fixed black 1 BFN2T ,90 BMN2T ,10 3 positions, 1 and 3 fixed black 1 BFN2F ,90 BMN2F ,10 3 positions, 3 transient, 0 and 1 fixed black 1 BFN2B ,10 BMN2B ,40 5 positions, 1.2,3 and 4 transient, 0 fixed, with interlock black 1 BFB4T ,60 BMB4T ,70 5 positions, 1.2,3 and 4 transient, 0 fixed, without interlock black 1 BFN4T ,60 BMN4T ,70 5 positions, fixed, with interlock black 1 BFB4F ,60 BMB4F positions, fixed, without interlock black 1 BFN4F ,60 BMN4F Push-button with emergency lever incl. flange for 2 contact blocks Can be operated from all directions red 1 BFTWR ,80 BMTWR Reset push-button without flange for contact blocks with»r«symbol blue 1 BSTRG ,20 BFTRG ,80 BMTRG H 13

136 H Control and signalling units Operators 22 mm Thermoplastic square, satin black Thermoplastic round, satin black Metal round, satin chrome Colour Packing Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. units Potentiometer operator black 1 BSUPZ ,60 BFUPZ ,20 BMUPZ ,60 Buzzer black, for AC/DC 24V 1 BSUAZ , V 1 BSUBZ ,60 BFUAZ ,30 BFUBZ ,60 Double function push-button (IP 40) incl. flange for 2 contact blocks with white pilot light and I/0 symbols green/red 1 BSDL ,70 with white pilot light, no symbols green/red 1 BSDL ,00 red cap raised, with I/0 symbols green/red 1 BSDR ,70 red cap raised, no symbols green/red 1 BSDR ,00 Pilot light incl. flange for bulb power supply suitable for labelling and symbols red 1 BSLMR ,38 green 1 BSLMG ,38 yellow 1 BSLMY ,38 blue 1 BSLMB ,38 white 1 BSLMW ,38 transparent 1 BSLMC ,38 BFLMR ,97 BFLMG ,97 BFLMY ,97 BFLMB ,97 BFLMW ,97 BFLMC ,97 BMLMR ,38 BMLMG ,38 BMLMY ,38 BMLMB ,38 BMLMW ,38 BMLMC ,38 clearly translucent, cannot be labelled red 1 green 1 yellow 1 blue 1 transparent 1 BFLKR ,97 BFLKG ,97 BFLKY ,97 BFLKB ,97 BFLKC ,97 BMLKR BMLKG BMLKY BMLKB BMLKC H 14

137 Control and signalling units H Contact blocks and power supplies for panel mounting Contacts, Designation Packing E-No. rated voltage units Flanges with 3 positions BTFC ,72 with 5 positions BTFC ,90 I/D clips with dual-location codes for switching units with 2 contacts for snap-on mounting on contact blocks SEU11, SEU20, SEU02 BTFCC ,50 Contact block Flat-plug connection 6 x 0.8 or 2 x 2.8 x 0.8mm 1 NC SEF ,38 1 NO SEF ,38 Screw connection 1 NC SES ,38 1 NO SES ,38 2 NC SEU ,10 1 NO 1 NC contact SEU ,10 2 NO SEU ,10 1 NC late opening trailing SEV01V ,64 1 NO early closing leading SEV10V ,64 Lamp-holder unit UL/CSA max. 250V, 2W Flat-plug connection 6 x 0.8 or 2 x 2.8 x 0.8mm max. 380V, 2W without BA 9s bulb BLNFO ,38 with transformer, 50/60 Hz, screw connection V/6V with 6V 1.2W BA 9s bulb BLTVJ , V/6V with 6V 1,2W BA 9s bulb BLTVN ,00 380V /6V with 6V 1,2W BA 9s bulb BLTVU , V/6V with 6V 1,2W BA 9s bulb BLTVW , V/6V with 6V 1,2W BA 9s bulb BLTVY ,00 with resistor, lamp test (diode), screw connection V AC/DC with 130V 2W BA 9s bulb BLNVR ,90 with resistor, screw connection V AC/DC with 130V 2W BA 9s bulb BLNVN ,60 with resistor and diode, screw connection V AC with 130V 2W BA 9s bulb BLNVD ,80 Screw connection max. 380V, 2W without BA 9s bulb BLNVO ,97 Screw connection with lamp test connection (diode) max. 300V, AC/DC, 2W without BA 9s bulb BLNVP ,10 Flashing light Y1 + 2 closed : steady light Y1 + 2 open : flush light Screw connection 24V AC/DC with 24V 2W BA 9s bulb BLMVD ,60 with transformer, 50/60 Hz, screw connection V/6V with 6V 0,6W BA 9s bulb BTMVJ , V/6V with 6V 0,6W BA 9s bulb BTMVN ,50 380V /6V with 6V 0,6W BA 9s bulb BTMVU , V/6V with 6V 0,6W BA 9s bulb BTMVW , V/6V with 6V 0,6W BA 9s bulb BTMVY ,20 H 15

138 H Control and signalling units Contact blocks and power supplies for base mounting Contacts, Designation Packing E-No. rated voltage units Contact block Screw connection 1 NC SEB NO SEB Lamp-holder unit Screw connection max. 380V, AC/DC, 2W without BA 9s bulb BDNBO Screw connection, with resistor and diode V AC with130v 2W BA 9s bulb BDNBD Resistor Screw connection V AC/DC for 60V 1,2W BA 9s bulb BDNBJ V AC/DC for 130V 2W BA 9s bulb BDNBN H 16

139 Control and signalling units H Push-button stations Description Designation Packing E-No. units Plastic enclosure IP66 including mounting rail for base mounting Thermoplastic grey 1 operator 72 x 72 x 53.5mm BI ,40 2 operators 72 x 110 x 53.5mm BI ,50 3 operators 72 x 140 x 53.5mm BI ,50 4 operators 72 x 175 x 53.5mm BI ,70 6 operators 72 x 235 x 53.5mm BI ,80 Thermoplastic grey with yellow cover 1 control point 72 x 72 x 53.5mm BIG ,90 Metal enclosure for front mounting of contact blocks and lamp holder unit grey 1 operator 87 x 87 x 75mm BMDG ,90 1 operator 1M 87 x 87 x 100mm BMDM ,40 2 operators 87 x 145 x 75mm BMDG ,40 2 operators 2M 87 x 145 x 100mm BMGM ,10 3 operators 87 x 195 x 100mm BMDG ,60 4 operators, 2 horizontal 87 x 145 x 75mm BMDG ,20 4 operators 87 x 145 x 100mm BMDM ,10 6 operators, 2 horizontal 87 x 195 x 100mm BMDG ,30 H 17

140 H Control and signalling units Accessories Description Designation Packing E-No. units Insert holder without write-out plates 27 x 16mm, for round operators BZST ,18 42 x 16mm, for round operators BZST ,85 27 x 16mm, for square operators BZST ,18 Round plate yellow diameter 59mm without text GKSOC ,18 NOT-AUS GKSDC ,00 EMERGENCY-STOP GKSEC ,00 ARRET-D URGENCE GKSFC ,00 EMERGENZA GKSIC ,00 diameter 78mm without text GKSOB ,79 NOT-AUS GKSDB ,02 EMERGENCY-STOP GKSEB ,02 ARRET-D URGENCE GKSFB ,02 EMERGENZA GKSIB ,02 Lamp neon lamp 110V/0,11W BA ,50 220V/0,33W BA ,50 bulb 6V/0.6W BA ,36 6V/1.5W BA ,36 12V/2W BA ,36 24V/2W BA ,36 30V/2.1W BA ,48 48V/2W BA ,48 60V/1.2W BA ,48 130V/2W BA ,48 220V/0.33W BA ,50 Multi-LED lamps yellow 6V BM06Y ,80 12V BM12Y ,80 24V BM24Y ,80 48V BM48Y ,80 110V BM11Y ,80 green 6V BM06G ,80 12V BM12G ,80 24V BM24G ,80 48V BM48G ,80 110V BM11G ,80 red 6V BM06R ,80 12V BM12R ,80 24V BM24R ,80 48V BM48R ,80 110V BM11R ,80 Multi-lamp hours live span 24V AC , hours live span 230V AC ,50 H 18

141 Control and signalling units H Accessories Description Designation Packing E-No. units Protector caps (rubber) for increasing the protection degree for square, flush double function push-buttons for increased protection to IP 66 transparent BSCDT ,53 for square, raised double function push-buttons for increased protection to IP 66 transparent BSCDT ,84 for square, flush push-buttons black BSCPS ,69 red BSCPR ,69 green BSCPG ,69 yellow BSCPY ,69 transparent BSCPT ,69 for square, raised push-buttons transparent BSAPT ,92 for round, flush push-buttons black BGCPS ,69 red BGCPR ,69 green BGCPG ,69 yellow BGCPY ,69 transparent BGCPT ,69 for round, raised push-buttons transparent BGAPT ,92 Spare key Code 3095 BSE ,20 Code 9901 BSE ,38 Code 9902 BSE ,38 Code 9903 BSE ,38 Code 9904 BSE ,38 Code 9905 BSE ,38 Code 9910 BSE ,38 Code 9916 BSE ,38 Code 9919 BSE ,38 Plugs square BSHP ,23 round BRHPR ,41 Adapter for using ø 22mm operators in ø 30mm openings plastic, black, round BCRAX ,10 Metal, burnished chroming, octagonal BCRAM ,89 Lockable cover for push-buttons, pilot lights, selector switches with lever BCRCL ,90 H 19

142 H Control and signalling units Accessories Description Designation Packing E-No. units Collar, guard ring for mushroom-head push-buttons ø 40mm BCFS Adapter Adapter (converts round to sqaure) plastic, black, 30 x 30mm for all push-buttons BCRSN (except mushroom-head form with forced opening and mushroom-head push-button with 3 positions) for push-buttons and illuminated push-buttons only with 1-pole contact blocks BCDPP only for early closing NOs (leading) type SEV 10v Extended screw for push-buttons length mm BCVLR Insert for actuating the central contact BSHAC Tools Locking-ring wrench for mounting ring BCWAF Bulb extractor BCWAL Cap extractor BCWAG Sample case Product range overview BKITA H 20

143 Control and signalling units H Accessories for square push-buttons with for square push-buttons with for round push-buttons with for round push-buttons with flush or recessed cap raised cap flush or recessed cap raised cap Colour Packing Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. units Caps for standard push-buttons black 1 BSBGS red 1 BSBGR green 1 BSBGG yellow 1 BSBGY blue 1 BSBGB white 1 BSBGW grey 1 BSBSS BSBSR BSBSG BSBSY BSBSB BSBSW BRBGS BRBGR BRBGG BRBGY BRBGB BRBGW BSBGU BRBSS ,00 BRBSR ,00 BRBSG ,00 BRBSY ,00 BRBSB ,00 BRBSW ,00 0,98 Caps for standard push-buttons with symbols red 1 BER BNR BAR BCR ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 blue BAL ,87 red BAR ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 red 1 BER BNR BAR BCR ,87 black 1 BES green 1 BEG BNS BNG BAS BAG BCS ,87 BCG ,87 H 21

144 H Control and signalling units Accessories for square pilot lights and for round pilot lights and for round pilot lights and illuminated push-buttons illuminated push-buttons illuminated push-buttons Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Diffusers/ inserts white BRFKL ,23 BRFLS ,49 BRFPL ,49 Diffusers/ inserts with symbols, white BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL ,87 BRU ,87 BWL ,18 BRL BRU BWL BRL BRU BWL BRL BRU BWL BRL BRU BWL BRL BRU BWL BRL BRU H 22

145 Control and signalling units H Accessories English German Description Packing Designation E-No. Description Packing Designation E-No. units units Write-on plates 20 x 20 mm Rectangular inserts 27 x 16 mm 0 1 BZG I 1 BZG II 1 BZG II 1 BZG I 1 BZG I II 1 BZG BZG FORWARD 1 BZG ,87 DOWN 1 BZG ,87 UP 1 BZG ON 1 BZG OFF 1 BZG CLOSE 1 BZG OPEN 1 BZG ,87 REVERSE 1 BZG ,87 AUTO 1 BZG LEFT 1 BZG RIGHT 1 BZG ,87 Without text 1 BZG CLOSE 1 BZE ,86 DOWN 1 BZE ,86 FAST 1 BZE ,86 FORW.-O-REVERSE 1 BZE ,86 FORW.-REVERSE 1 BZE ,86 FORWARD 1 BZE ,86 HAND-AUTO 1 BZE ,86 LEFT 1 BZE ,86 OFF-ON 1 BZE ,86 OPEN 1 BZE ,86 OPEN-CLOSE 1 BZE ,86 REVERSE 1 BZE ,86 RIGHT 1 BZE ,86 SLOW 1 BZE ,86 START 1 BZE ,86 STOP (red) 1 BZE ,86 STOP-START 1 BZE ,86 UP 1 BZE ,86 for push-button enclosures, black/red, text white AB 1 BZG ,87 AUF 1 BZG ,87 AUS 1 BZG ,87 AUS EIN 1 BZG BETRIEB 1 BZG ,87 EIN 1 BZG ,87 HALT 1 BZG ,87 HALT AUTO 1 BZG HALT 0 AUTO 1 BZG HEBEN 1 BZG ,87 LANGSAM 1 BZG ,87 LINKS 1 BZG ,87 NOT AUS 1 BZG ,87 OFFNEN 1 BZG ,87 RECHTS 1 BZG ,87 SCHLIESSEN 1 BZG SCHNELL 1 BZG SENKEN 1 BZG ,87 START 1 BZG ,15 STOP 1 BZG ,87 STÖRUNG 1 BZG ,87 TIPPEN 1 BZG ,87 VOR 1 BZG ZU 1 BZG ZURÜCK 1 BZG ,87 labelled, black/red, text white AB 1 BZS ,86 AUF 1 BZS ,86 AUS EIN 1 BZS ,86 AUS (red) 1 BZS ,86 AUTO HAND 1 BZS ,86 AUTO O HAND 1 BZS ,86 BETRIEB 1 BZS ,86 EIN 1 BZS ,86 HALT 1 BZS ,86 HEBEN 1 BZS ,86 I 1 BZS ,86 II 1 BZS ,86 II-O-I 1 BZS ,86 LANGSAM 1 BZS ,86 LINKS 1 BZS ,86 NOT AUS (red) 1 BZS ,86 O 1 BZS ,86 O-I 1 BZS ,86 ÖFFNEN 1 BZS ,86 RECHTS 1 BZS ,86 SCHLIESSEN 1 BZS ,86 SCHNELL 1 BZS ,86 SENKEN 1 BZS ,86 STÖRUNG 1 BZS ,86 TIPPEN 1 BZS ,86 VOR 1 BZS ,86 ZU 1 BZS ,86 ZURÜCK 1 BZS ,86 Inserts engraveable Label size 42 x 16mm black/red, text white no text 1 BZSUB ,76 Label size 27 x 16mm no text 1 BZSOB ,88 with text on black label (red label please state) extra price Label insert for contact blocks and lamp units white 1 BZSKL ,22 H 23

146 H Notes H 24

147 Limit switches / Interface devices I Limit switches Interface devices Metal body I 2 - I 3 Moulded plastic body I 4 Actuator Sensor Interface (AS-i) I 5 - I 6 I 1

148 I Limit switches Metal body Series GTg Cable entry 1 x, 1NC 1NO Limit switches with plug-in devices are wired switches with plug-in sockets for cable plugs (see accessories). With domed plunger Description Designation Packing E-No. units Snap-action contact Basic unit GTg 13 NE ,50 with straight plug-in device and 24V lighting insert GTg 13 NEL ,00 with angled plug-in device and 24V lighting insert GTg 13 NEL ,00 Lighting insert 24V GTg 13 NEL ,00 prepared for lighting insert 24V, type NGLE... GTg 13 NEL ,00 With roller plunger Snap-action contact, moulded plastic roller Basic unit GTg 13 NE ,50 prepared for lighting insert 24V, type NGLE... GTg 13 NEL ,00 Snap-action contact, steel roller Basic unit GTg 13 NE ,00 prepared for lighting insert 24V, type NGLE... GTg 13 NEL ,00 With roller crank Creeping contact, moulded plastic roller Lighting insert 24V GTg 13 SEL ,00 with straight plug-in device and 24V lighting insert GTg 13 SEL ,00 with angled plug-in device and 24V lighting insert GTg 13 SEL ,00 Snap-action contact, moulded plastic roller Basic unit GTg 13 NE ,00 with straight plug-in device and 24V lighting insert GTg 13 NEL ,00 with angled plug-in device and 24V lighting insert GTg 13 NEL ,00 Lighting insert 24V GTg 13 NEL ,00 With spring lever 1 ) Snap-action contact Basic unit GTg 13 NE ,00 with straight plug-in device and 24V lighting insert GTg 13 NEL ,00 with angled plug-in device and 24V lighting insert GTg 13 NEL ,00 Lighting insert 24V GTg 13 NEL ,00 With no lever 1 ) Snap-action contact (for roller swivelling lever, rod lever) Basic unit GTg 13 NE ,20 prepared for lighting insert 24V, type NGLE... GTg 13 NEL ,00 Special versions type GTg 13 NE, NEL, SEL With straight plug-in device, without lighting insert Version with plug-in device to DIN with 6 pin contacts E-No. of basic unit with suffix -220 With angled plug-in device, without lighting insert Version with piug-in device to DIN with 6 pin contacts E-No. of basic unit with suffix -230 With straight plug-in device, without lighting insert Piug-in device in German railways version with 5 blade contacts E-No. of basic unit with suffix ) Limit switches with adjustable lever are, because of the spring mechanism, not suitable for security circuits. I 2

149 Limit switches Metal body I Series GTg 11 MS Cable entry 3x, 1NC 1NO Description Designation Packing E-No. units With domed plunger Snap-action contact GTg 11 MS With roller plunger Snap-action contact, moulded plastic roller GTg 11 MS With roller lever Snap-action contact, moulded plastic roller GTg 11 MS With roller crank Snap-action contact, moulded plastic roller GTg 11 MS With roller crank, adjustable 1 ) Snap-action contact, moulded plastic rod GTg 11 MS With rod lever, adjustable 1 ) Snap-action contact, moulded plastic rod GTg 11 MS ) Limit switches with adjustable lever are, because of the spring mechanism, not suitable for security circuits. I 3

150 I Limit switches Moulded plastic body Series GTg 13 FS Cable entry 1x, 1NC 1NO Description Designation Packing E-No. units With domed plunger Snap-action contact GTg 13 FS With roller plunger With roller lever With roller crank With roller crank, adjustable 1 ) Snap-action contact, moulded plastic roller Snap-action contact, moulded plastic roller Snap-action contact, moulded plastic roller Snap-action contact, moulded plastic roller GTg 13 FS GTg 13 FS GTg 13 FS GTg 13 FS With rod lever, adjustable 1 ) Snap-action contact, moulded plastic rod GTg 13 FS Accessories for Type GTg 13 NE, NEL, SEL Description Type- VE E-No. designation units Drive for domed plunger Drive for crank Drive with spring lever KSA ,20 DHA ,50 FHA ,80 Drive with roller plunger Moulded plastic roller RSA ,40 Cable plug angle-shaped Cable plug ,20 straight Cable plug ,10 Lighting insert 12-60V NGLE ,20 220V NGLES ,30 Roller crank, rigid Moulded plastic roller ,30 Steel roller ,20 Roller crank, adjustable Moulded plastic roller ,20 Steel roller ,50 Rod lever, adjustable Moulded plastic ,90 1) Limit switches with adjustable lever are, because of the spring mechanism, not suitable for security circuits. I 4

151 Actuator Sensor Interface (AS-i) I Description Designation Packing Ref. no.. units AS-i Masters Single master Stand alone master with integrated PLC, space saving design, ideal for use in an enclosure, advanced AS-i diagnostics, RS485 serial inteface, two digit LCD displaying slaves addresses and error messages, each master includes the standard software kit (cat. no. SSK) BLC-CS2T Double master Stand alone master with integrated PLC functionality, space saving design, ideal for use in an enclosure, advanced AS-i diagnostics, RS485 serial interface, two digit LCD displaying slaves addresses and error messages, each master includes the standard software kit (cat. no. SSK) BLC-CD2T Master PC Board AS-i Master on a short PC-board, space saving design, ideal for use in an enclosure, advanced AS-i diagnostics, RS485 serial interface, includes standard software kit (cat. no. SSK) BLC-CPCBT AS-i Gateways Profibus DP Gateway IP20 Connection to Profibus DP, configuration without Profibus communication, integrated PLC functionality, error diagnostics via LEDs and LCD BLC-GPB2T Profibus DP Gateway IP67 Connection to Profibus DP, configuration without Profibus communication, integrated PLC functionality, error diagnostics via LEDs and LCD, IP67 protection degree, power supply connection via piercing technique BLC-GPB6T DeviceNet Gateway Configuration with DeviceNet manager, AS-i/DeviceNet gateway serves to connect the AS-i network to a superordinate DeviceNet network, acts as a master for the AS-i network and as an slave for the DeviceNet network BLC-GDN2T AS-i Slaves Slim module IP20 Special solution for control cabinets, usefull with DIN rail 4 inputs 22,5 assembly width BLC-M4E2T electrical outputs 22,5 assembly width BLC-M4AS2T inputs + 2 electrical outputs 22,5 assembly width BLC-M2E2AS2T outputs + 4 electrical outputs 45 mm assembly width BLC-M4E4AS2T inputs + 2 electrical outputs, relais 45 mm assembly width BLC-M2E2AR2T inputs + 4 outputs, relais 45 mm assembly width BLC-M4E4AR2T AS-i Slaves Flat module IP67 Cable piercing technique, connection via AS-interface flat cable, only 29 mm high, ideal for limited space applications, standard M12 connectors, external power LED 4 inputs + 4 electrical outputs BLC-F4E4AS6M inputs BLC-F8E6M inputs BLC-F4E6M electrical outputs BLC-F4AS6M inputs, 2 electrical outputs BLC-F2AE2AS6M I 5

152 I Actuator Sensor Interface (AS-i) Description Designation Packing Ref. no. units AS-i Slaves Standard module IP67 Cable piercing technique, IP67 protection degree, connection via AS-interface flat cable, standard M12 connectors, polarity reversal protection. 4 inputs BLC-T4E6M electrical outputs BLC-T4AS6M inputs relais BLC-T4AR6M inputs - 2 electrical outputs BLC-T2E2AS6M inputs + 2 outputs relais BLC-T2E2AR6M AS-i Slaves Accessories AS-i Mountingplate with standard bases Standard base for two yellow flat cables BLCTBYY Standard base for yellow + black flat cables BLCTBYB AS-i Mountingplate with standard bases Flat mounting plate for yellow - black cables BLCFD Rubber gaskets Rubber gaskets to protect (close) unused cable openings in standard bases and flat mounting plates BLCAGP AS-i Accessories Repeater The repeater is used to extend an existing AS-i line by up to 100 m Two power supplies are required to operate BLCAR Yellow cable 100 m AS-interface line BLC-A-YC Black cable AS-interface line for external supply voltage, up to 24V, oil resistant BLC-A-BC Address programming device Determining the slave address. New addressing xith check. Slave connection is short-circuit and overload proof LCD-display error analysis BLC-A-PD Addressing cable Auxiliary cable to be used with the addressing device BLCAAC Passive connection flat cable to M12 Passive connection from the yellow or black AS-i flat cable to M12 BLCAACPM Tree topology Passive connection to allow tree topology Connectable to standard base for two yellow cables BLCAPCTT Blank plugs M12 plugs to provide IP67 protection to unused I/O BLCABP AS-i Network Nominal current output 2.4A automatic restant, IP20 BLC-P-28LP2T Nominal current ouput 7A automatic restant, IP20 BLC-P-8HP2T AS-i Software Standard software kid (Freeware) SSK Registered software tool BLCSS I 6

153 Manual motor starters J Manual motor starters Motor protection circuit breakers Series Mbs 25 J 2 Accessories J 3 - J 4 Series Mbs 32 J 5 - J 6 Series Mbs 63 J 7 - J 8 Series Mbs 32/63 Auxiliaries J 9 - J 10 Accessories J 11 Enclosures J 12 Fuseless starters J 13 Busbars/plates J 14 Series Mbs 100 J 15 Accessories J 15 J 1

154 J Manual motor starters Series Mbs 25 Without auxiliary switches With factory assembled auxiliary switch block (1NC, 1NO) Mbs 25 with HS 9.11 left Mbs 25 with HS 9.11 right b-release s-release Packing E-No. E-No. E-No. [A] [A] units Basic breaker , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,00 Version for transformer , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,00 Motor protective circuit breaker Mbs 25 Short-circuit breaking capacity acc. to IEC b-release Setting range [A] 230V I cu I cs max. fuse (gl/gg) [ka] [ka] [ka] 400V 415V 500V 690V I cu I cs max. fuse (gl/gg) [ka] [ka] [ka] I cu I cs max. fuse (gl/gg) [ka] [ka] [ka] I cu I cs max. fuse (gl/gg) [ka] [ka] [ka] I cu I cs max. fuse (gl/gg) [ka] [ka] [ka] ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) No fuse necessary up to the indicated current values of I cu bzw. I cs. If the short circuit current is higher than the short-circuit breaking capacity, it is necessary to use a fuse. To increase the short circuit breaking capacity, the manual motor starter Mbs 25 can be combined with the limitor type id 50. Following are the values for the short-circuit capacity with this combinaton: Short-circuit breaking capacity I n [A] < 2.5 < 6.3 < 25 I cu [ka] 230V I cs [ka] I cu [ka] 400V I cs [ka] J 2

155 Manual motor starters J Series Mbs 25 Description Designation Packing E-No. units Aux. switch block type HS 9 for side mounting 1NO, 1NC HS ,30 2NO HS ,30 1NO (early make), 1NC HS 9V ,20 2NO (early make) HS 9V ,20 to increase contact reliability with small voltages 4-30V and 4-100mA, 1 C/O HS 9K ,20 Aux. switch block type HS 10 for internal mounting 1NO, 1NC HS Trip indication switch type HS 10R for internal mounting 1NO HS10R NC HS10R PE- and Neutral conductor block for side mounting Complete with through PE and N conductors Wiring cross section mm Shunt trip type a for internal mounting AC 220/230V 50Hz, 240V 60Hz ,40 AC 380/400V 50Hz, 440V 60Hz ,40 AC 110V 50Hz, 120V 60Hz ,40 Terminal clamps Undervoltage release type r for side mounting 4 terminals for a- or r-release for internal mounting AC 220/230V 50Hz, 240V 60Hz ,40 AC 380/400V 50Hz, 440V 60Hz ,40 AC 110V 50Hz, 120V 60Hz ,40 Adapter plate Rapid-Module type id 50 For exchanging type Mbs 25 with older manual motor starter (e.g. type Mb, Mbs 15, Mb 16, Mbs 6.10) For individual or group protection increases the breaking capacity of the Mbs 25 up to I cu 42kA/3~ 400 V; I u = 32A in combination with Mbs phase insulated busbar section type d fully insulated, U i = 690 V; I u = 63 A, for Mbs 25 with HS 9 with 2 devices 3-phase, 99mm long ,00 with 3 devices 3-phase, 154mm long ,80 with 4 devices 3-phase, 208mm long ,80 with 5 devices 3-phase, 262mm long ,00 J 3

156 J Manual motor starters Series Mbs 25 Description Packing E-No. units Protective cover Terminal block type db Moulded enclosure type i 3-pole for unused busbar terminations fully insulated, U i = 690 V; I u = 63 A 3-pole for 3-phase insulated busbar section type d Surface mounting Protection degree IP ,50 Protection degree IP ,30 Kit IP 55 for enclosure IP ,89 Enclosure type gi Moulded front plate type it especially for the American and Canadian market Protection grade IP 55 with NPT-threads 2 x 1/2 and 2 x 3/ Flush mounting Protection degree IP Protection degree IP Kit IP 55 for front plate IP Neutral conductor for enclosure and front plate Indication lamps AC, DC V white ,20 AC, DC V white ,20 AC, DC V white ,20 AC, DC V white ,20 AC, DC V white ,20 AC, DC V green ,20 AC, DC V green ,20 AC, DC V green ,20 AC, DC V green ,20 AC, DC V green ,20 AC, DC V red ,20 AC, DC V red ,20 AC, DC V red ,20 AC, DC V red ,20 Padlocking device Emergency OFF device For enclosure IP41 and front plate (colour yellow) for 3 padlocks in the OFF position For enclosure IP41 and front plate IP41 Mushroom head latched, pull to release For enclosure IP41 and front plate IP41, protection degree IP55, red pushbutton with yellow backplate Mushroom head key lockable (fact. ass.), release with key For enclosure IP41 and front plate IP41 Mushroom head transient J 4

157 Manual motor starters J Series Mbs 32 Thermal and magnetic protection Rated power 3phase motors at 400Vac Pn Rated current In (1) Thermal current setting range Instantaneous short-circuit release Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity at 400V Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity at 400V Designation Packing units Ref. nr kw A A A Icu ka Ics ka Standard breaking capacity Class / / / Mbs32SG001 Mbs32SG002 Mbs32SG004 Mbs32SG006 Mbs32SG010 Mbs32SG016 Mbs32SG025 Mbs32SG040 Mbs32SG063 Mbs32SG100 Mbs32SG130 Mbs32SG160 Mbs32SG200 Mbs32SG250 Mbs32SG High breaking capacity Class / / / Mbs32HG001 Mbs32HG002 Mbs32HG004 Mbs32HG006 Mbs32HG010 Mbs32HG016 Mbs32HG025 Mbs32HG040 Mbs32HG063 Mbs32HG100 Mbs32HG130 Mbs32HG160 Mbs32HG200 Mbs32HG250 Mbs32HG (1) Rated current: highest thermal current setting range value. J 5

158 J Manual motor starters Series Mbs 32 Magnetic protection Rated power 3phase motors at 400Vac Pn Rated current In Thermal current setting range (1) Instantaneous short-circuit release Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity at 400V Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity at 400V Designation Packing units Ref. nr kw A A A Icu ka Ics ka Standard breaking capacity / / / Ms32SG001 Ms32SG002 Ms32SG004 Ms32SG006 Ms32SG010 Ms32SG016 Ms32SG025 Ms32SG040 Ms32SG063 Ms32SG100 Ms32SG130 Ms32SG160 Ms32SG200 Ms32SG250 Ms32SG High breaking capacity / / / Ms32HG001 Ms32HG002 Ms32HG004 Ms32HG006 Ms32HG010 Ms32HG016 Ms32HG025 Ms32HG040 Ms32HG063 Ms32HG100 Ms32HG130 Ms32HG160 Ms32HG200 Ms32HG250 Ms32HG (1) Select appropriate thermal overload relay for the starter. See general catalogue Control & Automation Products. J 6

159 Manual motor starters J Series Mbs 63 Thermal and magnetic protection Rated power 3phase motors at 400Vac Pn Rated current In (1) Thermal current setting range Instantaneous short-circuit release Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity at 400V Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity at 400V Designation Packing units Ref. nr kw A A A Icu ka Ics ka Standard breaking capacity Class 10 3/ Mbs63SG100 Mbs63SG130 Mbs63SG160 Mbs63SG200 Mbs63SG250 Mbs63SG320 Mbs63SG400 Mbs63SG500 Mbs63SG High breaking capacity Class 10 3/ Mbs63HG100 Mbs63HG130 Mbs63HG160 Mbs63HG200 Mbs63HG250 Mbs63HG320 Mbs63HG400 Mbs63HG500 Mbs63HG (1) Rated current: highest thermal current setting range value. J 7

160 J Manual motor starters Series Mbs 63 Magnetic protection Rated power 3phase motors at 400Vac Pn Rated current In Thermal current setting range (1) Instantaneous short-circuit release Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity at 400V Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity at 400V Designation Packing units Ref. nr kw A A A Icu ka Ics ka Standard breaking capacity 3/ Ms63SG100 MS63SG130 Ms63SG160 Ms63SG200 Ms63SG250 Ms63SG320 Ms63SG400 Ms63SG500 Ms63SG High breaking capacity 3/ Ms63HG100 Ms63HG130 Ms63HG160 Ms63HG200 Ms63HG250 Ms63HG320 Ms63HG400 Ms63HG500 Ms63HG (1) Select appropriate thermal overload relay for the starter. See general catalogue Control & Automation Products. J 8

161 Manual motor starters J Series Mbs 32/63 Auxiliaries Description For use with Type Designation Packing units Ref. nr Auxiliary contact blocks Frontal Maximum 2 auxiliary contact blocks per manual motor starter M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s NO 1 NC MAHS10FB MAHS01FB Lateral Two contacts Side mounting on the left M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s NO + 1 NC 2 NO 2 NC MAHS11LL MAHS20LL MAHS02LL Two contacts Side mounting on the right M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s NO + 1 NC 2 NO 2 NC MAHS11LR MAHS20LR MAHS02LR Alarm contact block Frontal mounting on the right Single contact M(b)s32... and M(b)s NO 1 NC MAHSb10FR MAHSb01FR Auxiliary / alarm contact block Side mounting on the left (front alarm contact block can not be used at the same time) Two contacts M(b)s32... and M(b)s NO (Alarm)+1NO (Aux.) M(b)s32... and M(b)s NO (Alarm)+1NC (Aux.) M(b)s32... and M(b)s NC (Alarm)+1NO (Aux.) M(b)s32... and M(b)s NC (Alarm)+1NC (Aux.) MAHSd1010LL MAHSd1001LL MAHSd0110LL MAHSd0101LL Short-circuit alarm contact block Side mounting on the left Two contacts NO + NC Mechanical indication marking M(b)s32... and M(b)s NO + 1 NC MAHSs11LL J 9

162 J Manual motor starters Series Mbs 32/63 Auxiliaries Description For use with Coil voltage Designation Packing units Ref. nr Shunt trip device Side mounting on the right Can not be used together with the undervoltage trip device M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s V 50/60Hz 48V 60Hz 48V 50Hz / 60V 60Hz 110/127V 50Hz / 120V 60Hz 208V 60Hz 220/230V 50Hz / 240/260V 60Hz 240V 50Hz / 277V 60Hz 380/400V 50Hz 415/440V 50Hz / 460/480V 60Hz 500V 50Hz / 600V 60Hz 24 to 60Vdc 110 to 240Vdc MAaLRA1 MAaLRAF MAaLRAG MAaLRAJ MAaLRAM MAaLRAN MAaLRAR MAaLRAU MAaLRAW MAaLRAY MAaLRDD MAaLRDJ Undervoltage trip device Side mounting on the right Can not be used together with the shunt trip device M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s63... M(b)s32... and M(b)s V 50Hz 24V 60Hz 48V 50Hz 48V 60Hz 110/127V 50Hz / 120V 60Hz 208V 60Hz 220/230V 50Hz / 240/260V 60Hz 240V 50Hz / 277V 60Hz 380/400V 50Hz 415/440V 50Hz / 460/480V 60Hz 500V 50Hz / 600V 60Hz MArLRAD MArLRAC MArLRAG MArLRAF MArLRAJ MArLRAM MArLRAN MArLRAR MArLRAU MArLRAW MArLRAY With 2NO early make auxiliary contacts Side mounting on the right Can not be used together with the shunt trip device M(b)s32*S... M(b)s32*S... M(b)s32*S... M(b)s32*S... M(b)s32*S... M(b)s32*S... M(b)s32*S... M(b)s32*S... M(b)s32*S... M(b)s32*S... M(b)s32*S... 24V 50Hz 24V 60Hz 48V 50Hz 48V 60Hz 110/127V 50Hz / 120V 60Hz 208V 60Hz 220/230V 50Hz / 240/260V 60Hz 240V 50Hz / 277V 60Hz 380/400V 50Hz 415/440V 50Hz / 460/480V 60Hz 500V 50Hz / 600V 60Hz MAr20LTAD MAr20LTAC MAr20LTAG MAr20LTAF MAr20LTAJ MAr20LTAM MAr20LTAN MAr20LTAR MAr20LTAU MAr20LTAW MAr20LTAY Side mounting on the right Can not be used together with the shunt trip device M(b)s32H and M(b)s63... M(b)s32H and M(b)s63... M(b)s32H and M(b)s63... M(b)s32H and M(b)s63... M(b)s32H and M(b)s63... M(b)s32H and M(b)s63... M(b)s32H and M(b)s63... M(b)s32H and M(b)s63... M(b)s32H and M(b)s63... M(b)s32H and M(b)s63... M(b)s32H and M(b)s V 50Hz 24V 60Hz 48V 50Hz 48V 60Hz 110/127V 50Hz / 120V 60Hz 208V 60Hz 220/230V 50Hz / 240/260V 60Hz 240V 50Hz / 277V 60Hz 380/400V 50Hz 415/440V 50Hz / 460/480V 60Hz 500V 50Hz / 600V 60Hz MAr20LCAD MAr20LCAC MAr20LCAG MAr20LCAF MAr20LCAJ MAr20LCAM MAr20LCAN MAr20LCAR MAr20LCAU MAr20LCAW MAr20LCAY Protection against accidental finger touch (IP20) for GPS2 manual motor starters M(b)s63.. MAPTP J 10

163 Manual motor starters J Series Mbs 32/63 Accessories Description For use with Type Designation Packing units Ref. nr External handle operator Used for distance mounting on a panel Lockable with 1, 2 or 3 padlocks diameter 4 to 8 mm Two types: standard and emergency applications ON/OFF/TRIPPING position marking Protection degree: IP55 Shaft mounting depths: mm for MA32HB, MA32HR mm for MA63HB, MA63HR Package parts and quantities: 1 handle unit 1 shaft 1 shaft guide 1 latch (screws) 4 mounting screws M(b)s32*H... M(b)s32*H... M(b)s63... M(b)s63... Standard (black) Emergency (red/yellow) Standard (black) Emergency (red/yellow) MA32HB MA32HR MA63HB MA63HR Description For use with Connection Cat. nr Packing units Ref. nr Busbar system 3-phase feed-in terminals Main feeding terminal Upper connection M(b)s32... M(b)s63... Terminal capacity: 25 mm 2 Terminal capacity: 50 mm 2 Md32F Md63F Main busbar Modular spacing 45 mm for 2 M(b)s frontal auxiliaries for 3 M(b)s frontal auxiliaries for 4 M(b)s frontal auxiliaries for 5 M(b)s frontal auxiliaries Pin Pin Pin Pin Md32B02 Md32B03 Md32B04 Md32B Modular spacing 54 mm for 2 M(b)s mm lateral auxiliary for 3 M(b)s mm lateral auxiliary for 4 M(b)s mm lateral auxiliary for 5 M(b)s mm lateral auxiliary Pin Pin Pin Pin Md32B12 Md32B13 Md32B14 Md32B Modular spacing 63 mm for 2 M(b)s mm lateral auxiliary or 2 x 9mm lateral auxiliary for 4 M(b)s mm lateral auxiliary or 2 x 9mm lateral auxiliary Fork Fork Md32B22 Md32B Modular spacing 55 mm for 2 M(b)s frontal auxiliaries for 3 M(b)s frontal auxiliaries for 4 M(b)s frontal auxiliaries Pin Pin Pin Md63B02 Md63B03 Md63B Modular spacing 64 mm for 2 M(b)s mm lateral auxiliary for 3 M(b)s mm lateral auxiliary for 4 M(b)s mm lateral auxiliary Pin Pin Pin Md63B12 Md63B13 Md63B Modular spacing 73 mm for 2 M(b)s mm lateral auxiliary or 2 x 9mm lateral auxiliary for 4 M(b)s mm lateral auxiliary or 2 x 9mm lateral auxiliary Pin Pin Md63B22 Md63B Busbar cover Touch guard for non used space M(b)s32 M(b)s Md32G Md63G J 11

164 J Manual motor starters Series Mbs 32/63 Enclosures Description Designation Pack. Ref. nr Enclosures for M(b)s32SG Plastic enclosures Surface mounting IP41 Surface mounting IP55 Mi41 Mi Flush mounting IP41 Flush mounting IP55 MiT41 MiT Mounting accessories for all enclosures Neutral connection To be used inside the enclosure MiN Adopter set For enclosures used with M(b)s32*SG and undervoltage release with 2 NO auxiliary contacts MiAS Padlocking device For three padlocks with max. 8 mm shackle diameter Not to be used with emergency stop handle MiD Conversion kit IP41 to IP55 MiC Emergency mushroom push-button Mushroom with impulse functions Mushroom self latching, unlatching by turning Mushroom self latching, unlatching with a key MiPM MiPL MiPK Indicator lamps Green 110/220V Green 220/240V Green 380/440V Green 480/500V Green 600V Red 110/220V Red 220/240V Red 380/440V Red 480/500V Red 600V Transparent 110/220V Transparent 220/240V Transparent 380/440V Transparent 480/500V Transparent 600V MiLGJ MiLGN MiLGU MiLGX MiLGY MiLRJ MiLRN MiLRU MiLRX MiLRY MiLCJ MiLCN MiLCU MiLCX MiLCY J 12

165 Manual motor starters J Series Mbs 32/63 Fuseless starters Description For use with contactor ac/dc Frame size Designation Packing units Ref. nr Fuseless starters Link modules For mechanical and electrical connection between contactors and manual motor starters LS02K.., LS05.. LS4K.., LS5K.., LS7K.. LS4K.., LS5K.., LS7K.. LS11K... LS11K.. LS12K.., LS15K.. LS12K.., LS15K.. ac/dc ac dc ac dc ac dc M(b)s32 M(b)s32 M(b)s32 M(b)s32 M(b)s32 M(b)s32 M(b)s32 MF32L05B MF32L7A MF32L7D MF32L11A MF32L11D MF32L16A MF32L16D LS12K.., LS15K.. LS18K.. LS12K.., LS15K.. LS18K.. LS22K.., LS30K.. ac ac dc dc ac M(b)s63 M(b)s63 M(b)s63 M(b)s63 M(b)s63 MF63L16A MF63L18A MF63L16D MF63L18D MF63L30A Base plates Plastic plates for mounting the fuseless starter in panels or in 35 mm DIN rail LS4K.. LS5K.. LS7K.. LS11K.. LS12K.., LS15K.. LS12K.., LS15K.., LS18K.. LS22K.., LS30K.. ac/dc ac/dc ac/dc ac/dc M(b)s32 M(b)s32 M(b)s63 M(b)s63 MF32B1 MF32B4 MF63B2 MF63B Link connector For two base plates for reversing applications MF32C11B Wiring kits for reverseing starters Suitable to be used with link modules Upper and lower connections LS02K.., LS05.. LS4K.., LS5K.., LS7K.. LS11K.. LS12K.., LS15K.. LS18K.. LS22K.., LS30K.. ac/dc ac/dc ac/dc ac/dc ac/dc ac MF32R05B MF32R7B MF32R11B MF63R15B MF63R18B MF63R30A Description For use with contactor Designation Packing units Ref. nr Contactor cover for fuseless starter applications Fit the plastic cover into the front of the correspondent contactor to allow a clear identification of the terminal numbering LS4K.., LS5K.., LS7K.. without built-in auxiliary contact LS4K.., LS5K.., LS7K.. with built-in 1NO auxiliary contact LS4K.., LS5K.., LS7K.. with built-in 1NC auxiliary contact LS11K.. LS12K.., LS15K.. without built-in auxiliary contact LS12K.., LS15K.. with built-in 1NO auxiliary contact LS12K.., LS15K.. with built-in 1NC auxiliary contact LS18K.. LS22K.., LS30K.. MF00S7 MF10S7 MF01S7 MF00S11 MF00S16 MF10S16 MF01S16 MF00S18 MF00S J 13

166 J Manual motor starters Series Mbs 32/63 Busbars plates Description Width/length (mm) Rating (A) Frame size Contactor Designation Packing units Ref. nr Busbar adapter plates For manuam motor stater mounted alone 40 mm centre line spacing 45/139 54/139 54/ M(b)s32 M(b)s63 M(b)s MF32P40A MF40P40A MF63P40A mm centre line spacing 45/182 54/182 54/ M(b)s32 M(b)s63 M(b)s MF32P60A MF40P60A MF63P60A For fuseless stater applications 40 mm centre line spacing 45/182 45/182 55/ (1) 55/ (1) 63/ M(b)s32 M(b)s32 M(b)s32 M(b)s63 M(b)s63 LS02K/LS05 LS4K/LS5K/LS7K/LS11K LS12K/LS15K LS15K/LS18K LS22K/LS30K MF09P05B40A MF25P11B40A MF32P15B40A MF40P18B40A MF63P30B40A mm centre line spacing 45/182 45/182 55/ (1) 55/ (1) 63/ M(b)s32 M(b)s32 M(b)s32 M(b)s63 M(b)s63 LS02K/LS05K LS4K/LS11K LS12K/LS15K LS15K/LS18K LS22K/LS30K MF09P05B60A MF25P11B60A MF32P15B60A MF40P18B60A MF63P30B60A For reversing applications 60 mm centre line spacing base without contacts 45/182 55/182 63/ LS02K/LS05K/LS4K LS5K/LS7K/LS11K LS12K/LS15K/LS18K LS22K/LS30K MF25G11B60A MF32G18B60A MF63G30B60A (1) Using 60 mm extension base. Description Width (mm) Designation Packing units Ref. nr Accessories for busbar adapters Side module For adapter shoes extension (10 mm) 13.5 mm MF63W30B Plastic clip To couple 2 plates easily MF63C30B Spacer + screw Length 20 mm MF63K30B J 14

167 Motor protection circuit breakers J Series Mbs 100 b-release s-release Packing E-No. [A] [A] units Basic breaker AC 400V, I CU 65kA Accessories Description Designation Packing E-No. units Auxiliary switch block type»hs«mounting location: lower 1NO, 1NC hs ,70 2NO hs ,70 2NC hs ,70 Trip indication block type»m«b- + s trip indication-mounting location: upper b-release - 1NO ,20 s-release - 1NC b-release - 1NC ,20 s-release - 1NO b-release - 1NO ,20 s-release - 1NO b-release - 1NC ,20 s-release - 1NC Shunt trip type»a«mounting location: lower, 1NO (s-release ), consists of shunt trip and s-trip indication AC 230V 50Hz, 240V 60Hz ,00 AC 400V 50Hz, 440V 60Hz ,00 AC 110V 50Hz, 120V 60Hz ,00 Undervoltage release type»r«mounting location: lower, 1NO (s-release ), consists of undervoltage release and s-trip indication AC 230V 50Hz, 240V 60Hz ,00 AC 400V 50Hz, 440V 60Hz ,00 AC 110V 50Hz, 120V 60Hz ,00 J 15

168 J Notes J 16

169 Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 K Distribution and cable protection Selective type Generator protection Disconnecting switch Earth leakage protection Accessories Economy range N K 2 + K 4 Standard range S K 3 + K 4 High performance range H K 3 + K 5 Economy range N, standard range S K 6 Economy range N K 7 Economy range N K 8 Economy range N, high performance range H K 8 K 9 - K 16 K 1

170 K Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 Distribution and cable protection Basic circuit breaker MCLbs... Toggle handle 3-pole 4-pole, N-unprotected b-release s-release Packing I cu Designation E-No. I cu Designation E-No. [A] [ka] units [ka] [ka] Economy range N MCLbs 128 N , MCLbs 128 N , MCLbs 128 N , MCLbs 128 N , MCLbs 128 N , MCLbs 128 N , MCLbs 128 N ,00 12 MCLbs 128 N/IV ,00 25 MCLbs 128 N/IV ,00 25 MCLbs 128 N/IV ,00 25 MCLbs 128 N/IV ,00 25 MCLbs 128 N/IV ,00 25 MCLbs 128 N/IV ,00 25 MCLbs 128 N/IV , MCLbs 168 N , MCLbs 168 N , MCLbs 168 N , MCLbs 168 N , MCLbs 168 N , MCLbs 168 N ,00 30 MCLbs 168 N/IV ,00 30 MCLbs 168 N/IV ,00 30 MCLbs 168 N/IV ,00 30 MCLbs 168 N/IV ,00 30 MCLbs 168 N/IV ,00 30 MCLbs 168 N/IV , MCLbs 258 N , MCLbs 258 N , MCLbs 258 N , MCLbs 258 N ,00 35 MCLbs 258 N/IV ,00 35 MCLbs 258 N/IV ,00 35 MCLbs 258 N/IV ,00 35 MCLbs 258 N/IV , MCLbs 408 N , MCLbs 408 N , MCLbs 408 N ,00 35 MCLbs 408 N/IV ,00 35 MCLbs 408 N/IV ,00 35 MCLbs 408 N/IV , MCLbs 638 N , MCLbs 638 N , MCLbs 638 N ,00 35 MCLbs 638 N/IV ,00 35 MCLbs 638 N/IV ,00 35 MCLbs 638 N/IV , MCLbs 808 N , MCLbs 808 N ,00 50 MCLbs 808 N/IV ,00 50 MCLbs 808 N/IV , MCLbs 1258 N , MCLbs 1258 N , MCLbs 1258 N ,00 60 MCLbs1258 N/IV 1 ) ,00 60 MCLbs1258 N/IV 1 ) ,00 60 MCLbs1258 N/IV 1 ) ,00 Nomenclature MC Type b Thermal overload release hs Auxiliary switch block s Short-circuit release m Trip indication switch a Shunt trip hm Auxiliary and trip indication switch block r Undervoltage release f Solenoid / motor drive 1) N-protected K 2

171 Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 Distribution and cable protection K Basic circuit breaker MCLbs... Toggle handle 3-pole 4-pole, N-unprotected b-release s-release Packing I cu Designation E-No. I cu Designation E-No. [A] [ka] units [ka] [ka] Standard range S MCLbs 168 S , MCLbs 168 S , MCLbs 168 S , MCLbs 168 S , MCLbs 168 S , MCLbs 168 S ,00 50 MCLbs 168 S/IV ,00 50 MCLbs 168 S/IV ,00 50 MCLbs 168 S/IV ,00 50 MCLbs 168 S/IV ,00 50 MCLbs 168 S/IV ,00 50 MCLbs 168 S/IV , MCLbs 258 S , MCLbs 258 S , MCLbs 258 S , MCLbs 258 S ,00 50 MCLbs 258 S/IV ,00 50 MCLbs 258 S/IV ,00 50 MCLbs 258 S/IV ,00 50 MCLbs 258 S/IV , MCLbs 408 S , MCLbs 408 S , MCLbs 408 S ,00 50 MCLbs 408 S/IV ,00 50 MCLbs 408 S/IV ,00 50 MCLbs 408 S/IV , MCLbs 638 S , MCLbs 638 S , MCLbs 638 S ,00 50 MCLbs 638 S/IV ,00 50 MCLbs 638 S/IV ,00 50 MCLbs 638 S/IV , MCLbs 808 S , MCLbs 808 S ,00 70 MCLbs 808 S/IV ,00 70 MCLbs 808 S/IV ,00 High performance range H MCLbs 128 H , MCLbs 128 H , MCLbs 128 H , MCLbs 128 H , MCLbs 128 H , MCLbs 128 H , MCLbs 128 H , MCLbs 128 H/IV , MCLbs 128 H/IV , MCLbs 128 H/IV , MCLbs 128 H/IV , MCLbs 128 H/IV , MCLbs 128 H/IV , MCLbs 128 H/IV , MCLbs 168 H , MCLbs 168 H , MCLbs 168 H , MCLbs 168 H , MCLbs 168 H , MCLbs 168 H , MCLbs 168 H/IV , MCLbs 168 H/IV , MCLbs 168 H/IV , MCLbs 168 H/IV , MCLbs 168 H/IV , MCLbs 168 H/IV , MCLbs 258 H , MCLbs 258 H , MCLbs 258 H , MCLbs 258 H , MCLbs 258 H/IV , MCLbs 258 H/IV , MCLbs 258 H/IV , MCLbs 258 H/IV , MCLbs 408 H , MCLbs 408 H , MCLbs 408 H , MCLbs 408 H/IV , MCLbs 408 H/IV , MCLbs 408 H/IV , MCLbs 638 H , MCLbs 638 H , MCLbs 638 H , MCLbs 638 H/IV , MCLbs 638 H/IV , MCLbs 638 H/IV ,00 K 3

172 K Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 Distribution and cable protection, only s-release Basic circuit breaker MCLs... s-release only, toggle handle 3-pole I u s-release Packing I cu Designation E-No. [A] [ka] units [ka] Economy range N MCLs 128 N , MCLs 128 N , MCLs 168 N , MCLs 168 N , MCLs 168 N , MCLs 168 N , MCLs 168 N , MCLs 258 N , MCLs 258 N , MCLs 408 N , MCLs 408 N , MCLs 638 N , MCLs 638 N , MCLs 638 N , MCLs 808 N , MCLs 1258 N , MCLs 1258 N ,00 Standard range S MCLs 168 S , MCLs 168 S , MCLs 258 S , MCLs 408 S , MCLs 408 S , MCLs 638 S , MCLs 638 S , MCLs 638 S , MCLs 808 S K 4

173 Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 Distribution and cable protection, only s-release K Basic circuit breaker MCLs... s-release only, toggle handle 3-pole I u s-release Packing I cu Designation E-No. [A] [ka] units [ka] High performance range H MCLs 128 H , MCLs 128 H , MCLs 168 H , MCLs 168 H , MCLs 168 H , MCLs 168 H , MCLs 168 H , MCLs 258 H , MCLs 258 H , MCLs 408 H , MCLs 408 H , MCLs 638 H , MCLs 638 H , MCLs 638 H ,00 K 5

174 K Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 Selective, ranges N and S Basic circuit breaker MCLbs... Toggle handle b-release s-release Packing I cu Designation E-No. [A] [ka] units [ka] Economy range N MCLbs 168 Ns , MCLbs 168 Ns , MCLbs 168 Ns , MCLbs 258 Ns , MCLbs 258 Ns , MCLbs 408 Ns , MCLbs 408 Ns , MCLbs 408 Ns , MCLbs 638 Ns , MCLbs 638 Ns , MCLbs 638 Ns , MCLbs 808 Ns , MCLbs 808 Ns , MCLbs 1258 Ns , MCLbs 1258 Ns , MCLbs 1258 Ns ,00 Standard range S MCLbs 168 Ss , MCLbs 168 Ss , MCLbs 168 Ss , MCLbs 258 Ss , MCLbs 258 Ss , MCLbs 408 Ss , MCLbs 408 Ss , MCLbs 408 Ss , MCLbs 638 Ss , MCLbs 638 Ss , MCLbs 638 Ss , MCLbs 808 Ss , MCLbs 808 Ss ,00 K 6

175 Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 Generator protection K Basic circuit breaker MCLbs... Toggle handle 3-pole 4-pole b-release s-release Packing I cu Designation E-No. I cu Designation E-No. [A] [ka] units [ka] [ka] Economy range N MCbs 128 N , MCbs 128 N , MCbs 128 N , MCbs 128 N , MCbs 128 N , MCbs 128 N ,00 25 MCbs 128 N/IV ,00 25 MCbs 128 N/IV ,00 25 MCbs 128 N/IV ,00 25 MCbs 128 N/IV ,00 25 MCbs 128 N/IV ,00 25 MCbs 128 N/IV , MCbs 168 N , MCbs 168 N ,00 30 MCbs 168 N/IV ,00 30 MCbs 168 N/IV , MCbs 258 N , MCbs 258 N ,00 35 MCbs 258 N/IV ,00 35 MCbs 258 N/IV , MCbs 408 N , MCbs 408 N ,00 35 MCbs 408 N/IV ,00 35 MCbs 408 N/IV , MCbs 638 N , MCbs 638 N ,00 35 MCbs 638 N/IV ,00 35 MCbs 638 N/IV , MCbs 808 N , MCbs 808 N ,00 50 MCbs 808 N/IV ,00 50 MCbs 808 N/IV , MCbs 1258 N , MCbs 1258 N ,00 60 MCbs 1258 N/IV ,00 60 MCbs 1258 N/IV ,00 K 7

176 K Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 Disconnecting switch / Earth leakage protection Disconnecting switch Toggle handle 3-pole 4-pole I u Packing I cm Designation E-No. I cm Designation E-No. [A] [ka] units [ka] [ka] Economy range N MCT128N , MCT128N , MCT128N/IV , MCT128N/IV , MCT168N , MCT168N/IV , MCT258N ,00 4 MCT258N/IV , MCT408N ,00 9 MCT408N/IV , MCT638N ,00 9 MCT638N/IV , MCT808N ,00 14 MCT808N/IV , MCT1258N ,00 32 MCT1258N/IV ,00 Earth leakage protection Toggle handle 3-pole 4-pole b-release s-release Packing I cm Designation E-No. I cm Designation E-No. [A] [ka] units [ka] [ka] Economy range N MCL 128 NM , MCL 128 NM , MCL 128 NM , MCL 128 NM , MCL 128 NM , MCL 128 NM , MCL 128 NM ,00 12 MCL 128 NM/IV ,00 25 MCL 128 NM/IV ,00 25 MCL 128 NM/IV ,00 25 MCL 128 NM/IV ,00 25 MCL 128 NM/IV ,00 25 MCL 128 NM/IV ,00 25 MCL 128 NM/IV ,00 High performance range H MCL 128 HM , MCL 128 HM , MCL 128 HM , MCL 128 HM , MCL 128 HM , MCL 128 HM , MCL 128 HM , MCL 128 HM/IV , MCL 128 HM/IV , MCL 128 HM/IV , MCL 128 HM/IV , MCL 128 HM/IV , MCL 128 HM/IV , MCL 128 HM/IV ,00 K 8

177 Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 K Accessories Description Frame size Designation Packing E-No. units Earth leakage protection unit, 3-pole To be fitted to load terminals, supplied with shunt trip (a) Type M M ,00 Type M M ,00 Type M M ,00 Type M (MC638) M ,00 Earth leakage protection unit, 4-pole To be fitted to load terminals, supplied with shunt trip (a) Type M 160/IV 28 M160/IV ,00 Type M 250/IV 38 M250/IV ,00 Type M 400/IV 48 M400/IV ,00 Type M 630/IV 58 (MC638) M630/IV ,00 Earth leakage protection unit type MTS Consisting of separate relay and sum current transformer, shunt trip (a) to be ordered additionally AC220/240V, ø 100mm MTS ,00 AC220/240V, ø 34mm MTS ,00 AC220/240V, ø 55mm MTS ,00 AC220/240V, ø 70mm MTS ,00 AC380/415V, ø 100mm MTS ,00 AC380/415V, ø 34mm MTS ,00 AC380/415V, ø 55mm MTS ,00 AC380/415V, ø 70mm MTS ,00 Auxiliary switch block type hs 1 ) Switches simultaneously with the main contacts 1 CO ,00 1 CO 28, ,20 1 CO 48, ,80 1 CO ,90 2 CO ,20 2 CO 28, ,90 2 CO 48, ,00 2 CO ,00 3 CO ,00 3 CO ,00 Trip indication switch block type m 1 ) Indicates switch position»tripped«acc. to function table below 1 CO ,80 1 CO 28, ,50 1 CO 48, ,50 1 CO ,00 Trip indication when tripping through: Size 18 Size 28 Size 38 Size 48 Size 58 Size 68 b X X X X X X s X X X X X X a X X X r X X X Aux. and trip indication switch block type hm 1 ) Function as for auxiliary switch and m switch block 1 CO HS, 1 CO m ,90 1 CO HS, 1 CO m 28, ,50 Aux. and trip indication switch block type 2 hm 1 ) Function as for auxiliary switch and m switch block 2 CO HS, 1 CO m 28, ) Configurations see page K 10 Frame sizes: 18 = MC = MC = MC = MC 638/ = MC = MC 1258 K 9

178 K Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 Accessories Description Frame size Packing E-No. units Shunt trip type»a«(ac: 50/60Hz) 24V AC/DC ,00 48V AC/DC ,00 60V AC/DC ,00 110/127V AC/DC ,00 220/250V AC/DC ,00 380/440V AC/DC ,00 500/550V AC/DC ,00 24V AC/DC 28, ,00 48V AC/DC ,00 60V AC/DC ,00 92/127V AC/DC ,00 180/250V AC/DC ,00 380/500V AC/DC ,00 24V AC/DC 48, ,00 48V AC/DC ,00 60V AC/DC ,00 110/127V AC/DC ,00 220/250V AC/DC ,00 380/440V AC/DC ,00 500/550V AC/DC ,00 24V AC ,00 48V AC ,00 110/127V AC ,00 220/240V AC ,00 380/415V AC ,00 440/500V AC ,00 24V DC ,00 48V DC ,00 60V DC ,00 110/125V DC ,00 220V DC ,00 250V DC ,00 Configurations Auxiliary trips a and r Auxiliary and trip indication switch block Terminal N Terminal L1 Terminal L2 Terminal L3 Frame size 18 - hs or m or hm - a or r Frame size 28/38 as L1 (L1 not equipped) a or r or hs - hs or m or hm or 2hm Frame size 48/58 - a or r or hs m a or r or hs Frame size 68 hs a or r or hs m a or r or hs K 10 Frame sizes: 18 = MC = MC = MC = MC 638/ = MC = MC 1258

179 Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 K Accessories Description Frame size Packing E-No. units Undervoltage release type»r«undervoltage release with time delay (DC 60V on request) 24V, 50Hz ,00 48V, 50Hz ,00 110/127V, 50/60Hz ,00 220/240V, 50/60Hz ,00 380/440V, 50/60 Hz ,00 550V, 50Hz ,00 24V DC ,00 48V DC ,00 110/125V DC ,00 220/250V DC ,00 24V, 50Hz 28, ,00 48V, 50Hz ,00 110/127V, 50/60Hz ,00 220/240V, 50/60Hz ,00 380/440V, 50/60 Hz ,00 550V, 50Hz ,00 24V DC ,00 48V DC ,00 110V DC ,00 220V DC ,00 250V DC ,00 24V, 50Hz 48, ,00 48V, 50Hz ,00 110/127V, 50Hz ,00 220/240V, 50Hz ,00 400V, 50 Hz ,00 415/440V, 50Hz ,00 500V, 50Hz ,00 24V, 60Hz ,00 110/127V, 60Hz ,00 230V, 60Hz ,00 380/440V, 60 Hz ,00 24V DC ,00 48V DC ,00 110/125V DC ,00 220V DC ,00 250V DC ,00 24V, 50Hz ,00 48V, 50Hz ,00 110V, 50/60Hz ,00 230V, 50/60Hz ,00 400V, 50 Hz ,00 415V, 50Hz ,00 440V, 50/60Hz ,00 500V, 50Hz ,00 24V DC ,00 48V DC ,00 110V DC ,00 125V DC ,00 220V DC ,00 250V DC ,00 Time delay 250ms 230V, 50/60Hz , V, 50Hz ,00 230V, 50/60Hz 28, , V, 50Hz ,00 230V, 50/60Hz 48, , V, 50Hz ,00 230V, 50/60Hz , V, 50Hz ,00 Frame sizes: 18 = MC = MC = MC = MC 638/ = MC = MC 1258 K 11

180 K Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 Accessories Description Frame size Packing E-No. units Solenoid/Motor drive type»f«with automatic control for ON and OFF switching Frame size 18 - solenoid drive, Frame size motor drive, Interlocking facility for 3 (frame size 18 only 1) padlocks in OFF position 48V, AC ,00 110/127V, AC ,00 220/240V, AC ,00 380/415V, AC ,00 24V, DC ,00 48V, DC ,00 110/130V, DC ,00 220/250V, DC ,00 24V, AC 28, ,00 48V, AC ,00 110/127V, AC ,00 220/240V, AC ,00 24V, DC ,00 48V, DC ,00 110/125V, DC ,00 220/250V, DC ,00 24V, AC 48, ,00 48V, AC ,00 110/127V, AC ,00 220/240V, AC ,00 400V, AC ,00 415V, AC ,00 24V, DC ,00 48V, DC ,00 110V, DC ,00 220V, DC ,00 24V, AC ,00 48V, AC ,00 110/127V, AC ,00 220/240V, AC ,00 400V, AC ,00 415V, AC ,00 24V, DC ,00 48V, DC ,00 110V, DC ,00 220V, DC ,00 Rotary front drive for direct mounting With black handle and grey front plate With red handle and yellow front plate for emergency switch, protection IP40, Locking device for 3 padlocks for OFF position (bow diameter 6-8mm) black-grey 28, Emergency OFF type black-grey 48, Emergency OFF type black-grey Emergency OFF type K 12 Frame sizes: 18 = MC = MC = MC = MC 638/ = MC = MC 1258

181 Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 K Rotary front drives With black handle and grey front plate or with red handle and yellow front plate for emergency switch,with extension shaft, protection IP55 with appropriate enclosure,locking device for 3 padlocks, effective only in the OFF position (bow diameter 6-8 mm) Rotary front drive, for use in enclosures Description Frame size Packing E-No. units Clockwise switch direction black-grey 28, Emergency OFF type black-grey 48, Emergency OFF type black-grey Emergency OFF type Frame sizes: 28 = MC = MC 638/ = MC = MC = MC 408 K 13

182 K Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 Plug-in technique Device cannot be plugged in or withdrawn in the ON position. Control connectors: order additionally Not applicable for devices with earthfault release. Plug-in technique, front connection (including craddle) Description Frame size Packing E-No. units 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 128N ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 128H ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 128N/IV ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 128H/IV ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 168N + S ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 168H ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 168N/IV + S/IV ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 168H/IV ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 258N + S ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 258H ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 258N/IV + S/IV ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 258H/IV ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 408N + S + H ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 408N/IV + S/IV + H/IV ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 638N + S + H ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 638N/IV + S/IV + H/IV ,00 Plug-in technique, rear connection (including craddle) 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 128N ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 128H ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 128N/IV ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 128H/IV ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 168N + S ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 168H ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 168N/IV + S/IV ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 168H/IV ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 258N + S ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 258H ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 258N/IV + S/IV ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 258H/IV ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 408N + S + H ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 408N/IV + S/IV + H/IV ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 638N + S + H ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 638N/IV + S/IV + H/IV ,00 K 14 Frame sizes: 18 = MC = MC = MC = MC 638/ = MC = MC 1258

183 Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 K Withdrawable technique Description Frame size Packing E-No. units Withdrawable technique, front connection (including craddle) Defined disconnected and connected position, positive protection against contact of main contacts. Control connectors: order additionally Interlocking in disconnected position with padlock. 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 168N + S ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 168N/IV + S/IV ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 258N + S ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 258N/IV + S/IV ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 408N + S + H ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 408N/IV + S/IV + H/IV ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 638N + S + H ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 808N + S ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 638N/IV + S/IV + H/IV ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 808N/IV + S/IV ,00 3-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 1258N ,00 4-pole, for MCL/MC/MCT 1258N/IV ,00 Control lead connector Finger safe - 8 poles Max. equipment: Frame size 18: 1 connector Frame sizes 28-48: 2 connectors Frame sizes 58-68: 3 connectors , ,20 Connection accessories 1 set per pole Rear bolt connection for MC ,60 for MC ,20 for MC ,20 Box clamp 95 mm , mm , mm ,80 Rear palm connection for MC ,00 for MC638 up to 500A ,50 for MC638 up to 600A ,80 for MC808 up to 800A ,90 for MC ,00 Front palm connection for MC ,00 Padlocking device for toggle handle ON/OFF locking device for 3 padlocks, bow diameter 6mm ,60 28, , , ,20 Frame sizes: 18 = MC = MC = MC = MC 638/ = MC = MC 1258 K 15

184 K Moulded case circuit breaker Series MC 8 Accessories Description Frame size Packing E-No. units Terminal cover, 3-pole Kit for upper and lower terminals ,20 28, , ,20 Terminal cover, 4-pole Kit for upper and lower terminals ,00 28, , ,10 Kit for mechanical interlocking of 2 circuit breakers Only factory assembled Factory assembled, for 3 circuit breakers on request for MCL/MC/MCT pole ,00 for MCL/MC/MCT 638/ ,00 for MCL/MC/MCT 168/ / ,00 for MCL/MC/MCT pole ,00 for MCL/MC/MCT ,00 for MCL/MC/MCT 638/ and 4-pole ,00 for MCL/MC/MCT 638/ / ,00 K 16 Frame sizes: 18 = MC = MC = MC = MC 638/ = MC = MC 1258

185 Air circuit breakers L Circuit breaker series ME Disconnecting switch series MET Accessories Withdrawable technique Economy range N L 2 Standard range S1 L 3 - L 4 High performance range H L 5 - L 7 Economy range N L 8 Standard range S1 L 9 - L 10 High performance range H L 11 - L 13 Operating mechanism L 14 - L 15 Overcurrent trips L 16 Accessories L 17 - L 18 Craddles and accessories L 19 - L 20 L 1

186 L Air circuit breaker Series ME Economy range N, up to 415V AC Basic design: basic breaker, current transformer, h and-operated mechansim type x2, overcurrent trip type bse 3-1 rms, auxiliary switch types HS 107 (3NO 3NC) Horizontal terminals I u [A] I ct [A] I cn [ka] Designation Packing E-No. E-No. units Vertical terminals 3-pole Frame size ME 637 N , ME 637 N , ME 637 N , ME 807 N , ME 1007 N , ME 1257 N , , , , , , ,00 Frame size ME 1607 N , ME 2007 N , , ,00 Frame size ME 2507 N , ,00 Frame size ME 3207 N , ,00 4-pole Unprotected neutral conductor with neutral conductor on left side. For neutral conductor on the right side, use E-No. suffix -020 Frame size ME 637 N/IV , ME 637 N/IV , ME 637 N/IV , ME 807 N/IV , ME 1007 N/IV , ME 1257 N/IV , , , , , , ,00 Frame size ME 1607 N/IV , ME 2007 N/IV , , ,00 Frame size ME 2507 N/IV , ,00 L 2 I u = Rated current of breaker I ct = Rated current transformer I cn = Rated breaking capacity at 400/415V AC

187 Air circuit breaker Series ME L Standard range S1, up to AC 500V Basic design: basic breaker, current transformer, hand-operated mechansim type x2, overcurrent trip type bse 3-1 rms, auxiliary switch types HS 107 (3NO 3NC) Horizontal terminals I u [A] I ct [ka] I cn [A] Designation Packing E-No. E-No. units Vertical terminals 3-pole Frame size ME 637 S , ME 637 S , ME 637 S , ME 807 S , ME 1007 S , ME 1257 S , , , , , , ,00 Frame size ME 1607 S , ME 2007 S , , ,00 Frame size ME 2507 S , ,00 Frame size ME 3207 S , ,00 4-pole Unprotected neutral conductor neutral conductor on left side. For neutral conductor on the right side, use E-No. suffix -020 Frame size ME 637 S1/IV , ME 637 S1/IV , ME 637 S1/IV , ME 807 S1/IV , ME 1007 S1/IV , ME 1257 S1/IV , , , , , , ,00 Frame size ME 1607 S1/IV , ME 2007 S1/IV , , ,00 Frame size ME 2507 S1/IV , ,00 Frame size ) ) 70 ME 3207 S1/IV , ,00 I u = Rated current of breaker I ct = Rated current transformer I cn = Rated breaking capacity at 400/415V AC 1) 4 poles: 2000A L 3

188 L Air circuit breaker Series ME Standard range S1/S, up to 690V AC Basic design: basic breaker, current transformer, hand-operated mechansim type x2, overcurrent trip type bse 3-1 (ME 4007/5007 S: bse 3-3), auxiliary switch types HS 107 (3NO 3NC) Horizontal terminals I u [A] I ct [A] I cn [ka] Designation Packing E-No. E-No. units Vertical terminals 3-pole Frame size ME 637 S , ME 637 S , ME 637 S , ME 807 S , ME 1007 S , ME 1257 S , , , , , , ,00 Frame size ME 1607 S , ME 2007 S , , ,00 Frame size ME 2507 S , ,00 Frame size ME 3207 S , ,00 Frame size ME 4007 S , ,00 Frame size ME 5007 S , ME 6307 S 1 ) ,00 4-pole Unprotected neutral conductor with bse 3-1 rms, neutral conductor on left side. For neutral conductor on the right side, use E-No. suffix -020 Frame size ME 637 S1/IV , ME 637 S1/IV , ME 637 S1/IV , ME 807 S1/IV , ME 1007 S1/IV , ME 1257 S1/IV , , , , , , ,00 Frame size ME 1607 S1/IV , ME 2007 S1/IV , , ,00 Frame size ME 2507 S1/IV , ,00 Frame size ) ) 70 ME 3207 S1/IV 3 ) , ,00 Frame size ME 4007 S/IV 3 ) ,00 L 4 I u = Rated current of breaker I ct = Rated current transformer I cn = Rated breaking capacity at 400/415V AC 1) withdrawable version only, order craddle frame size 70 additionally 2) 4 th pole: 2000A 3) neutral conductor only on left side

189 Air circuit breaker Series ME L High performance range H, up to 500V AC Basic design: basic breaker, current transformer, hand-operated mechansim type x2, overcurrent trip type bse 3-1 rms, auxiliary switch types HS 107 (3NO 3NC) Horizontal terminals I u [A] I ct [A] I cn [ka] Designation Packing E-No. E-No. units Vertical terminals 3-pole Frame size ME 637 H , ME 637 H , ME 637 H , ME 807 H , ME 1007 H , ME 1257 H , , , , , , ,00 Frame size ME 1607 H , ME 2007 H , , ,00 Frame size ME 2507 H , ,00 Frame size ME 3207 H , ,00 4-pole Unprotected neutral conductor with bse 3-1 rms, neutral conductor on left side. For neutral conductor on the right side, use E-No. suffix -020 Frame size ME 637 H/IV , ME 637 H/IV , ME 637 H/IV , ME 807 H/IV , ME 1007 H/IV , ME 1257 H/IV , , , , , , ,00 Frame size ME 1607 H/IV , ME 2007 H/IV , , ,00 Frame size ME 2507 H/IV , ,00 Frame size ) ) 100 ME 3207 H/IV , ,00 I u = Rated current of breaker I ct = Rated current transformer I cn = Rated breaking capacity at 400/415V AC 1) 4 th pole: 2000A, on left side only L 5

190 L Air circuit breaker Series ME High performance range H, up to 690V AC Basic design: basic breaker, current transformer, hand-operated mechansim type x2, overcurrent trip type bse 3-1 rms, auxiliary switch types HS 107 (3NO 3NC) Horizontal terminals I u [A] I ct [A] I cn [ka] Designation Packing E-No. E-No. units Vertical terminals 3-pole Frame size ME 637 H , ME 637 H , ME 637 H , ME 807 H , ME 1007 H , ME 1257 H , , , , , , ,00 Frame size ME 1607 H , ME 2007 H , , ,00 Frame size ME 2507 H , ,00 Frame size ME 3207 H , ,00 4-pole Unprotected neutral conductor with bse 3-1 rms, neutral conductor on left side. For neutral conductor on the right side, use E-No. suffix -020 Frame size ME 637 H/IV , ME 637 H/IV , ME 637 H/IV , ME 807 H/IV , ME 1007H/IV , ME 1257 H/IV , , , , , , ,00 Frame size ME 1607 H/IV , ME 2007 H/IV , , ,00 Frame size ME 2507 H/IV , ,00 Frame size ) ) 100 ME 3207 H/IV , ,00 L 6 I u = Rated current of breaker I ct = Rated current of transformer I cn = Rated breaking capacity at 400/415V AC 1) 4 th pole: 2000A, on the left side only

191 Air circuit breaker Disconnecting switch Series MET L Economy range N, up to 415V AC Basic design: basic breaker, hand-operated mechansim type x2, auxiliary switch types HS 107 (3NO 3NC) (without current transformer and overcurrent trip) Horizontal terminals I u [A] Designation Packing E-No. E-No. units Vertical terminals 3-pole Frame size MET 637 N , MET 807 N , MET 1007 N , MET 1257 N , , , , ,00 Frame size MET 1607 N , MET 2007 N , , ,00 Frame size MET 2507 N , ,00 Frame size MET 3207 N , ,00 4-pole Neutral conductor on left side. For neutral conductor on the right side, use E-No. suffix -020 Frame size MET 637 N/IV , MET 807 N/IV , MET 1007 N/IV , MET 1257 N/IV , , , , ,00 Frame size MET 1607 N/IV , MET 2007 N/IV , , ,00 Frame size MET 2507 N/IV , ,00 I u = Rated current of breaker L 7

192 L Air circuit breaker Disconnecting switch Series MET Standard range S1, up to 500V AC Basic design: basic breaker, hand-operated mechansim type x2, auxiliary switch types HS 107 (3NO 3NC) (without current transformer and overcurrent trip) Horizontal terminals I u [A] Designation Packing E-No. E-No. units Vertical terminals 3-pole Frame size MET 637 S , MET 807 S , MET 1007 S , MET 1257 S , , , , ,00 Frame size MET 1607 S , MET 2007 S , , ,00 Frame size MET 2507 S , ,00 Frame size MET 3207 S , ,00 4-pole Neutral conductor on left side. For neutral conductor on the right side, use E-No. suffix -020 Frame size MET 637 S1/IV , MET 807 S1/IV , MET 1007 S1/IV , MET 1257 S1/IV , , , , ,00 Frame size MET 1607 S1/IV , MET 2007 S1/IV , , ,00 Frame size MET 2507 S1/IV , ,00 Frame size ) MET 3207 S1/IV , ,00 I u = Rated current of breaker 1) 4 th pole: 2000A, on left side only L 8

193 Air circuit breaker Disconnecting switch Series MET L Standard range S1/S, up to AC 690V Basic design: basic breaker, hand-operated mechansim type x2, auxiliary switch types HS 107 (3NO 3 NC) (without current transformer and overcurrent trip) Horizontal terminals I u [A] Designation Packing E-No. E-No. units Vertical terminals 3-pole Frame size MET 637 S , MET 807 S , MET 1007 S , MET 1257 S , , , , ,00 Frame size MET 1607 S , MET 2007 S , , ,00 Frame size MET 2507 S , ,00 Frame size MET 3207 S , ,00 Frame size MET 4007 S ,00 Frame size MET 5007 S , MET 6307 S pole Neutral conductor on left side. For neutral conductor on the right side, use E-No. suffix -120 Frame size MET 637 S1/IV , MET 807 S1/IV , MET 1007 S1/IV , MET 1257 S1/IV , , , , ,00 Frame size MET 1607 S1/IV , MET 2007 S1/IV , , ,00 Frame size MET 2507 S1/IV , ,00 Frame size ) MET 3207 S1/IV 3 ) , ,00 Frame size MET 4007 S/IV 3 ) ,00 I u = Rated current of breaker 2) 4 th pole: 2000A 3) Neutral conductor only on the left side L 9

194 L Air circuit breaker Disconnecting switch Series MET High performance range H, up to AC 500V Basic design: basic breaker, hand-operated mechansim type x2, auxiliary switch types HS 107 (3NO 3NC) (without current transformer and overcurrent trip) Horizontal terminals I u [A] Designation Packing E-No. E-No. units Vertical terminals 3-pole Frame size MET 637 H , MET 807 H , MET 1007 H , MET 1257 H , , , , ,00 Frame size MET 1607 H , MET 2007 H , , ,00 Frame size MET 2507 H , ,00 Frame size MET 3207 H , ,00 4-pole Neutral conductor on left side. For neutral conductor on the right side, use E-No. esuffix -020 Frame size MET 637 H/IV , MET 807 H/IV , MET 1007 H/IV , MET 1257 H/IV , , , , ,00 Frame size MET 1607 H/IV , MET 2007 H/IV , , ,00 Frame size MET 2507 H/IV , ,00 Frame size ) MET 3207 H/IV , ,00 I u = Rated current of breaker 1) 4 th pole: 2000A, on the left side only L 10

195 Air circuit breaker Disconnecting switch Series MET L High performance range H, up to AC 690V Basic design: basic breaker, hand-operated mechansim type x2, auxiliary switch types HS 107 (3NO 3NC) (without current transformer and overcurrent trip) Horizontal terminals I u [A] Designation Packing E-No. E-No. units Vertical terminals 3-pole Frame size MET 637 H , MET 807 H , MET 1007 H , MET 1257 H , , , , ,00 Frame size MET 1607 H , MET 2007 H , , ,00 Frame size MET 2507 H , ,00 Frame size MET 3207 H , ,00 4-pole Neutral conductor on left side. For neutral conductor on the right side, use E-No. suffix -120 Frame size MET 637 H/IV , MET 807 H/IV , MET 1007 H/IV , MET 1257 H/IV , , , , ,00 Frame size MET 1607 H/IV , MET 2007 H/IV , , ,00 Frame size MET 2507 H/IV , ,00 Frame size ) MET 3207 H/IV , ,00 I u = Rated current of breaker 1) 4 th pole: 2000A, on the left side only L 11

196 L Air circuit breaker Series ME and MET Operating mechanism Description Packing E-No. units Hand-operated mechanism type x2 Closing mechanically via push-button Standard Hand-operated mechanism type xv Motor-operated mechanism type fv with SU control Control unit modes can be interchanged subsequently Closing electrically via closing coil 42V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 110V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 220V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 230V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 240V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 24V, DC ,00 48V, DC ,00 60V, DC ,00 110V, DC ,00 125V, DC ,00 220V, DC ,00 fv 1 separate command for pre-charging and closing 42V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 110V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 220V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 230V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 240V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 24V, DC ,00 48V, DC ,00 60V, DC ,00 110V, DC ,00 125, DC ,00 220V, DC ,00 fv 2 automatic pre-charging after OFF 42V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 110V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 220V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 230V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 240V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 24V, DC ,00 48V, DC ,00 60V, DC ,00 110V, DC ,00 125, DC ,00 220V, DC ,00 fv 3.1 automatic pre-charging after ON 42V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 110V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 220V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 230V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 240V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 24V, DC ,00 48V, DC ,00 60V, DC ,00 110V, DC ,00 125, DC ,00 220V, DC ,00 L 12

197 Air circuit breaker Series ME and MET L Operating mechanism Description Packing E-No. units fv 3.2 automatic pre-charging after ON and OFF 42V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 110V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 220V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 230V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 240V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 24V, DC ,00 48V, DC ,00 60V, DC ,00 110V, DC ,00 125, DC ,00 220V, DC ,00 fv 4 automatic closing after pre-charging 42V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 110V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 220V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 230V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 240V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 24V, DC ,00 48V, DC ,00 60V, DC ,00 110V, DC ,00 125, DC ,00 220V, DC ,00 L 13

198 L Air circuit breaker Series ME Overcurrent trip bse.../rms Electronic trip unit type bse 3, 3-pole b- s- Time k- ZVS g- Designation Packing E-No. Channel Channel delay Channel Channel units x x bse 3-1 rms 1 Standard - x x x bse 3-2 rms ,00 x x x x bse 3-3 rms ,00 x x x x x bse rms ,00 x x x x x bse 3-4 rms ,00 x x x x x x bse 3-5 rms ,00 x x x x x x bse 3-6 rms ,00 x x x x x x bse 3-7 rms ,00 Electronic trip unit type bse 4, 4-pole x x bse 4-1 rms ,00 x x x bse 4-2 rms ,00 x x x x bse 4-3 rms ,00 x x x x x bse rms ,00 x x x x x bse 4-4 rms ,00 x x x x x x bse 4-5 rms ,00 x x x x x x bse 4-6 rms ,00 x x x x x x bse 4-7 rms ,00 Overload channel b bse 3-1/4-1 bis bse 3-5/4-5 : Ib = x Ict bse 3-6/4-6 : Ib = x Ict bse 3-7/4-7 : Ib = x Ict Instantaneous short- Instantaneous short- Short-circuit channel s circuit channel k 1 ) circuit channel k 2 ) Ict = A : Is = x Ict Ik = x Ict Ik = 18 x Ict Ict = A : Is = x Ict Ik = x Ict Ik = 10 x Ict Ict = 3200A : Is = x Ict Ik = x Ict Ik = 8 x Ict Ict = 4000A : Is = x Ict Ik = x Ict Ik = 10 x Ict Ict = A : Is = x Ict Ik = x Ict Ik = 10 x Ict Time delay ts = 0-300ms Earth fault channel g Ict = A : Ig = x Ict tg = ms 1) Adjustable for bse 3-6/4-6 and bse 3-7/4-7 2) Fixed from bse 3-3/4-3 to bse 3-5/4-5 Note: For bse 3/4-3 to bse 3/4-7 an auxiliary voltage of 24V DC is necessary - standard version The bse 3/4-3 and 3/4-3.1 are also available with auxiliary voltage V AC or V AC - Please make a special remark on the order. Spare parts: see our catalogue ME07 air circuit breakers L 14

199 Air circuit breaker Series ME and MET L Accessories Shunt trip type a Description Designation Packing E-No. units 42V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 110V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 220V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 230V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 240V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 24V, DC ,00 48V, DC ,00 60V, DC ,00 110V, DC ,00 125V, DC ,00 220V, DC ,00 Undervoltage release type r 42V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 110V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 220V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 230V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 240V, AC 50/60Hz ,00 24V, DC ,00 48V, DC ,00 60V, DC ,00 110V, DC ,00 125V, DC ,00 220V, DC ,00 Delayed tripping device type c In steel enclosure type CK 1 (r-trip in DC 220V necessary), t = 1.5 ± 0.5sec, with transformer 230V, AC 50/60Hz C/AC 230V ,00 110V, AC 50/60Hz C/AC 110V ,00 380V, AC 50/60Hz C/AC 380V ,00 400V, AC 50/60Hz C/AC 400V ,00 440V, AC 50/60Hz C/AC 440V ,00 External capacitor trip unit In plastic enclosure 75x125x125 (a-trip in DC 220V necessary) 220/230V, operating range Uc n Indicator switch for trip unit type bse 3-1, 3-2/4-1, 4-2 Indicator switch for b + s-channel 1 Self-resetting NO contact, with switch pulse actuation, quick-make contact approx ms, with spring system charged m Indicator switch for drive mechanism Indicator switch spring energy system charged For hand operated mechanism. With motor operated mechanism and SU-control, this indication is always supplied. m Indicator switch breaker ready for closing Indication: breaker in OFF position, spring energy system is charged and undervoltage released (if available) is energized. For hand and motor-operated mechanisms. With motor-operated mechanism and microswitch control, this indication is always supplied. m Indicator switch for trip unit type bsm 3, bsmz 3, bsm 4, bsmz 4 on request L 15

200 L Air circuit breaker Series ME and MET Accessories Ceramic inserts Description Designation Packing E-No. units For arc chute for reducing safety clearance intervals BG ,00 for range S1 and H version 500V BG ,00 Locking device type y For hand and motor-operated mechanisms, with mechanical interlocking of the handoperated mechanism and electrical interlocking of the motor-operated mechanism With cylindrical lock ON and OFF pushbutton interlocked, key removable in both positions y ,00 ON pushbutton interlocked, key removable in both positions y ,00 ON and OFF pushbutton interlocked, key only removable when interlocked y ,00 ON pushbutton interlocked, key only removable when interlocked y ,00 For 3 padlocks ON and OFF pushbutton interlocked, y ,00 ON pushbutton interlocked, y ,00 Transparent cover type k For trip unit type bse 3/4 and breakers k 1 incl. Sealing cover type p Protection against unauthorized operation, transparent, for ON and OFF push-buttons p Door cut-out frame type ü For front cover of breaker in fixed or withdrawable version ü Sealing plate type d For handle, together with k + a gasket, increases protection level of front cover of breaker to IP54 d Doorlocking device Door stop for fixed version (door on the left side) q Angular spacer For mounting on vertical bars (2x per breaker required), separate delivery Bowden wire interlock Kit for mechanical interlocking of 2 circuit breakers for fixed version (additional electrical locking provided for) Test device type P 107 For checking all funtions of trip unit type bse-rms P Withdrawable technique Conversion kit 3-, 4-pole ME frame size 10/10 IV ,00 ME frame size 20/20 IV, 30/30 IV, 40/40 IV ,00 ME frame size ,00 ME frame size 50 IV ,00 ME frame size ,00 L 16

201 Air circuit breaker Withdrawable technique L Craddles for Series ME With complete positively-actuated personal protection, door surround with positively actuated operatingposition indicator, crankhandle opening lockable with 3 padlocks, telescopic rail extension, crank handle 3-pole 2 plugs = 32 contacts, for 3 plugs = 48 contacts: E-No. see withdrawable technique "Accessories" on page L 20 Description Short-circuit Designation Packing E-No. device [ka] units Upper and lower terminals vertical (standard version) ME S1, N 105 T10v ,00 ME H, S1, N 176 T10v ,00 ME 1607 H, S1, N 220 T20v ,00 ME 2007 H, S1, N 220 T20v ,00 ME 2507 H, S1, N 220 T30v ,00 ME 3207 H, S1, N 220 T40v ,00 Upper and lower terminals horizontal ME S1, N 105 T10w ,00 ME H, S1, N 176 T10w ,00 ME 1607 H, S1, N 220 T20w ,00 ME 2007 H, S1, N 220 T20w ,00 ME 2507 H, S1, N 220 T30w ,00 ME 3207 H, S1, N 220 T40w ,00 ME 4007 S 220 T ,00 ME 5007/6307 S 220 T ,00 Upper terminals horizontal and lower terminals vertical ME S1, N 105 T10k ,00 ME H, S1, N 176 T10k ,00 ME 1607 H, S1, N 220 T20k ,00 ME 2007 H, S1, N 220 T20k ,00 ME 2507 H, S1, N 220 T30k ,00 ME 3207 H, S1, N 220 T40k ,00 4-pole 2 plugs = 32 contacts, for 3 plugs = 48 contacts: E-No. see withdrawable technique "Accessories" on page L 20 Upper and lower terminals vertical (standard version) ME S1, N 105 T10v1/IV ,00 ME H, S1, N 176 T10v2/IV ,00 ME 1607 H, S1, N 220 T20v1/IV ,00 ME 2007 H, S1, N 220 T20v2/IV ,00 ME 2507 H, S1, N 220 T30v/IV ,00 ME 3207 H, S1, N 220 T40v/IV ,00 Upper and lower terminals horizontal ME S1, N 105 T10w1/IV ,00 ME H, S1, N 176 T10w2/IV ,00 ME 1607 H, S1, N 220 T20w1/IV ,00 ME 2007 H, S1, N 220 T20w2/IV ,00 ME 2507 H, S1, N 220 T30w/IV ,00 ME 3207 H, S1, N 220 T40w/IV ,00 ME 4007 S 220 T50w/IV ,00 Upper terminals horizontal and lower terminals vertical ME S1, N 105 T10k1/IV ,00 ME H, S1, N 176 T10k2/IV ,00 ME 1607 H, S1, N 220 T20k1/IV ,00 ME 2007 H, S1, N 220 T20k2/IV ,00 ME 2507 H, S1, N 220 T30k/IV ,00 ME 3207 H, S1, N 220 T40k/IV ,00 Ordering note A complete withdrawable type consists of the following E-No. (at min.) : - Circuit breaker Series ME or disconnecting switch Series MET with horizontal terminals (pages L 2 to L 13) - Conversion kit (page L 18 bottom) - Craddle L 17

202 L Air circuit breaker Withdrawable technique Accessories Description Designation Packing E-No. units Position indicator switch Can be used optionally to indicate isolated, test or operational positions (max. 3 position indicator switches possible for bse 3-7) for ME frame size up to 40/40IV ,00 1 switch 1CO for ME frame size up to 40/40IV ,00 2 switch 2CO for ME frame size up to 40/40IV ,00 3 switch 3CO for ME frame size up to 40/40IV ,00 4 switch 4CO for ME frame size up to 40/40IV ,00 5 switch 5CO for ME frame size up to 40/40IV ,00 6 switch 6CO for ME frame size 50/50IV, 60, ,00 1 HS 5 2NC 2NO for ME frame size 50/50IV, 60, ,00 2 HS 5 4NC 4NO for ME frame size 50/50IV, 60, ,00 3 HS 5 6NC 6NO for ME frame size 50/50IV, 60, ,00 4 HS 5 8NC 8NO Door-locking device Prevents door from being opened when breaker is in test or operational position for ME frame size up to 40/40IV for door hinged on the left side defeatable Type lly ,00 for door hinged on the left side undefeatable Type lln ,00 for door hinged on the right side defeatable Type lry ,00 for door hinged on the right side undefeatable Type lrn ,00 Locking device type wi For locking crank-handle opening for ME frame size up to 40/40IV With cylindrical lock Locking device for crank-handle opening type we For mechanical locking of crank-handle opening when breaker is in ON position for ME frame size up to 40/40IV Bowden wire interlock type g2 Kit for mechanically interlocking 2 withdrawable type circuit breakers for ME frame size up to 40/40IV L 18

203 LV fuse systems / Disconnector loadbreak switches M LV fuse systems Disconnector loadbreak switches Fused disconnector loadbreak switches Disconnectors with motor drive Fuse links, fuse bases M 2 - M 3 Semiconductor protection fuses M 4 Fuse loadbreak switch disconnectors and strips M 5 - M 6 Series Dilos M 7 - M 12 Rotary handle, changeover switch, accessories M 15 - M 18 Series Fulos M 13 - M 14 Rotary handle, changeover switch, accessories M 15 - M 18 Series Dilos S / Fulos S Disconnectors with motor drive M 19 Disconnectors with trip indication switch M 20 M 1

204 M LV fuse systems Fuse links Handle lugs live 500 V ~ 690 V ~ Iu [A] Packing E-No. E-No. units NT 000 / NT 00 NT , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,00 NT 00 NT , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,10 NT , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,70 NT , , , , , , , , , , , , ,00 NT 4a , ,00 M 2

205 LV fuse systems M Fuse bases Size Designation Packing E-No. units 1-pole 00 SiSt 101/I ,30 00 with box type terminals for multistrand cables up to 70mm 2 SiSt 101/I ,90 1 SiSt 201/I ,00 2 SiSt 401/I ,60 3 SiSt 601/I ,00 4a SiSt 1251/I ,00 3-pole 00 SiSt 101/III ,40 1 SiSt 201/III ,00 2 SiSt 401/III ,00 3 SiSt 601/III ,00 Accessories Separation wall 2 pieces with holder Clip-on handle , ,00 2/ , Clip-on handle with arm cuff Electronic fuse monitoring unit AC V Esü ,00 AC V Esü ,00 Isolating links 00/ , ,50 2/ ,10 M 3

206 M LV fuse systems Semiconductor protection fuses 160 V ~ 500 V ~ 800 V ~ I u Packing Designation E-No. Designation E-No. Designation E-No. units 40 1 NG , NG , NG , NG ,10 NG ,20 NG ,10 NG ,10 NG ,30 NG ,90 NG , NG , NG ,80 NG , NG , NG , NG ,80 NG , NG ,00 NG , NG ,00 NG , NG , NG , NG ,00 M 4

207 LV fuse systems M Fuse loadbreak switch disconnectors and strips Description Designation Packing E-No. units Fuse loadbreak switch disconnectors for standard applications Size NH-00 with terminal screws M8 LTSiSt ,00 Size NH-1 with terminal screws M10 LTSiSt ,00 Size NH-2 with terminal screws M10 LTSiSt ,00 Size NH-3 with terminal screws M10 LTSiSt ,00 Accessories LTSiSt 168 Cover indicator switch ,40 DIN support rail fixing ,00 Masking frame ,64 Striker indicator switch Fuse-monitoring kit ,60 Handle protection above ,70 Handle protection below ,70 Clamp-type terminals mm 2 Cu Set of ,40 Accessories LTSiSt 258 Clamp-type terminals mm 2 Cu Set of ,60 Prism-shaped terminals mm 2 Al/Cu Set of ,50 Double prism-shaped terminals mm 2 Al/Cu Set of ,90 Fuse-tester handle protection ,50 Handle protection above ,50 Handle protection below ,50 Striker indicator switch Fuse-monitoring kit ,00 Masking frame ,00 Accessories LTSiSt 408 Clamp-type terminals mm 2 Cu Set of ,50 Prism-shaped terminals mm 2 Al/Cu Set of ,60 Double prism-shaped terminals mm 2 Al/Cu Set of ,00 Handle protection above ,40 Handle protection below ,40 Fuse-tester handle protection ,50 Striker indicator switch Fuse-monitoring kit ,00 Masking frame ,00 Clamp-type terminals for flat copper Set of ,90 Accessories LTSiSt 638 Prism-shaped terminals mm 2 Al/Cu Set of ,30 Double prism-shaped terminals mm 2 Al/Cu Set of ,70 Handle protection above ,70 Handle protection below ,70 Striker indicator switch Fuse-monitoring kit ,00 Masking frame ,00 Common accessories Finger-protection locking device for LTSiSt ,90 Cover indicator switch for LTSiSt ,00 M 5

208 M LV fuse systems Fuse loadbreak switch disconnectors and strips Remarks Packing E-No. Designation units Fuse loadbreak switch disconnectors for heavy-duty Size NH-00 LTSiSt ,00 Size NH-1 LTSiSt ,00 Size NH-2 LTSiSt ,00 Size NH-3 LTSiSt ,00 Size NH-00 with thermo-magnetic fuse monitoring LTSiSt 167/MSÜ ,00 Size NH-1 with thermo-magnetic fuse monitoring LTSiSt 257/MSÜ ,00 Size NH-2 with thermo-magnetic fuse monitoring LTSiSt 407/MSÜ ,00 Size NH-3 with thermo-magnetic fuse monitoring LTSiSt 637/MSÜ ,00 Accessories Masking frame for LTSiSt ,40 for LTSiSt ,80 for LTSiSt 407/ ,10 Cover indicator switch left for LTSiSt ,70 Cover indicator switch right for LTSiSt ,70 Auxiliary switch fitting kit right for LTSiSt ,10 for leading contacts for LTSiSt ,10 Fuse loadbreak disconnector strips Size NH-00 with clamp-type terminals HFSV ,00 Size NH-1 with terminal screws HFSV ,00 Size NH-2 with terminal screws HFSV ,00 Size NH-3 with terminal screws HFSV ,00 Accessories HFSV 160 Busbar adaptor165mm ,00 Compensating plates ,30 Adaptor angles Set of ,70 Busbar terminals Set of ,90 Terminal screws M8 x 16 Set of ,61 Prolonged terminal cover ,43 Seating clips with fixing screws M ,20 Designation plate cover ,10 Auxiliary switch ,10 Accessories HFSV Prolonged terminal cover M 6

209 Disconnector loadbreak switches Dilos M Dilos A Description Catalogue-no. I e Designation Packing E-No. [A] units For mounting on DIN rail or mounting plates Handle black, 3-pole D/ Dilos ,90 D/ ,90 D/ ,00 D/ ,20 Handle red, front plate yellow (VDE 0113), 3-pole D/ ,90 D/ ,00 D/ ,10 D/ ,30 Accessories Modules for mounting on the left or right Switched neutral conductor D/ ,50 D/ ,50 D/ ,50 D/ ,50 N fixed D/ ,43 PE fixed D/ ,43 Auxiliary switch 1 NC, 1 NO D/ ,70 Terminal cover 3-pole D/ ,54 Terminal cover 1-pole D/ ,85 Rotary handle for door mounting Complete with shaft 305 mm, seal, flange and I/D plate black, IP 54 D/ ,70 black, IP 65, lockable D/ ,20 rot / yellow, IP 65, lockable D/ ,20 For door mounting Supplied without rotary handle 3-pole D/ Dilos ,70 D/ ,80 D/ ,90 D/ ,10 Accessories Modules for mounting on the left or right Switched neutral conductor D/ ,50 D/ ,50 D/ ,50 D/ ,50 N fixed D/ ,43 PE fixed D/ ,43 Auxiliary switch 1 NC, 1 NO D/ ,70 Terminal cover 3-pole D/ ,54 Terminal cover 1-pole D/ ,85 Rotary handle Lockable with 1 padlock, complete with shaft 305 mm, seal, flange and I/D plate black, IP65, lockable D/ ,30 red / yellow, IP65, lockable D/ ,30 M 7

210 M Disconnector loadbreak switches Dilos Dilos A For mounting on DIN rail Description Catalogue-no. I e Designation Packing E-No. [A] units Black rotary handle, lockable with 1 padlock 2-pole V/ Dilos ,30 3-pole V/ ,00 4-pole V/ ,80 3-pole + fixed N V/ ,70 2-pole V/ ,40 3-pole V/ ,10 4-pole V/ ,70 3-pole + fixed N V/ ,50 2-pole V/ ,80 3-pole V/ ,80 4-pole V/ ,10 3-pole + fixed N V/ ,70 2-pole V/ ,30 3-pole V/ ,20 4-pole V/ ,90 3-pole + fixed N V/ ,50 Accessories Rotary handle with extension shaft 262 mm for door mounting Handle black V/ Dilos ,60 Handle red / yellow V/ Dilos ,70 Connection terminal cover V/ Dilos ,13 M 8

211 Disconnector loadbreak switches Dilos M Dilos 1, 40 up to 125A Dilos 2, A For mounting on DIN rail or mounting plates Description Catalogue-no. I e Designation Packing E-No. [A] units Lockable switches with black rotary handle, transparent cover 2-pole D/ Dilos ,40 3-pole D/ ,40 4-pole D/ ,40 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,40 2-pole D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 4-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 2-pole D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 4-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 2-pole D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 4-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 2-pole D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 4-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 2-pole D/ Dilos ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 4-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 2-pole D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 4-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 Emergency-OFF disconnector switch Dilos 1 and 2 For mounting on DIN rail or mounting plates Lockable yellow switch with red rotary handle and yellow cover acc. to VDE pole D/ Dilos ,40 4-pole D/ ,40 3-pole D/ ,00 4-pole D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 4-pole D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 4-pole D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Dilos ,00 4-pole D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 4-pole D/ ,00 M 9

212 M Disconnector loadbreak switches Dilos Elos A Description Catalogue-no. I e Designation Packing E-No. [A] units For mounting on DIN rail or mounting plates As Dilos 1, though can only be switched with additional allen key and is therefore interesting as supply switch for electricity supply companies. 4-pole D/ Elos ,00 4-pole D/ ,00 4-pole D/ ,00 Accessories For Dilos 1 and Elos For Dilos 2 For Dilos 1 and Dilos 2 Terminal cover 2x sealable D/ ,50 3 spacer terminals for Al/Cu 35mm 2 D/ ,50 4 spacer terminals for Al/Cu 35mm 2 D/ ,20 Conversion kit for busbars 15mm D/ ,80 Allen key for Elos D/ ,50 Set of 3 spacer terminals D/ ,30 Set of 4 spacer terminals D/ ,10 Terminal cover D/ ,41 10 flat tabs with ring for Faston 6.3 x 0.8 mm D/ ,28 Auxiliary switch 1 co D/ ,90 Auxiliary switch 2 co D/ ,80 Locking device for 3 padlocks D/ ,41 Rotary handle with extension shaft for mounting on doors or enclosure covers, lockable black rotary handle, shaft 200mm D/ ,60 red rotary handle, shaft 200mm D/ ,60 black rotary handle, shaft 400mm D/ ,80 red rotary handle, shaft 400mm D/ ,80 M 10

213 Disconnector loadbreak switches Dilos M Dilos 1H to Dilos 9, 40A up to 4000A For panel mounting Description Catalogue-no. I e Designation Packing E-No./Ref.No. [A] units Supplied without rotary handle 3-pole D/ Dilos 1H pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ Dilos pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ Dilos pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ Dilos 6S pole + N D/ kA pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ Dilos 6S pole + N D/ kA pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ Dilos 7S pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ Dilos 8S pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ Dilos 9S pole + fixed N D/ pole D/ Dilos pole + N D/ M 11

214 M Disconnector loadbreak switches Dilos Emergency OFF disconnector switch Dilos 1H, 3 acc. VDE 0113 For panel mounting Description Catalogue-no. I e Designation Packing E-No. [A] units With transparent cover and yellow label, without rotary handle 3-pole D/ Dilos 1H ,40 3-pole + N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Dilos ,00 3-pole + N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + N D/ ,00 M 12

215 Fused disconnector loadbreak switches Fulos M Fulos acc. to DIN 100A-1000A For panel mounting Description Catalogue-no. I e Designation Packing E-No./Ref.No. [A] units Supplied without rotary handle 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ NH ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + N D/ ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + N D/ ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ NH ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ NH ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ NH ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos 3S ,00 3-pole + N D/ NH ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ NH ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 Emergency OFF disconnector switch Fulos For panel mounting acc. to VDE 0113 With transparent cover and yellow label, without rotary handle 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ NH ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ ,00 3-pole + N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ NH ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ NH ,00 M 13

216 M Fused disconnector loadbreak switches Fulos Fulos acc. to NF 50A-100A For panel mounting Description Catalogue-no. I e Designation Packing E-No./Ref.No. [A] units Supplied without rotary handle 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ NF 14 x ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ NF 22 x ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 Fulos acc. to BS 32A up to 1250A For panel mounting 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ Type A ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ Type A ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ Type A ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ Type B1-B ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ Type B1-B ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos 3S ,00 3-pole + N D/ BS C1-C ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos 3S ,00 3-pole + N D/ BS C ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ Type D ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 M 14

217 Disconnector loadbreak switches Dilos & Fulos M Rotary handles Description Catalogue-no. for series Packing E-No./Ref.No. units Rotary handles for direct mounting with interlocking possibility, for Dilos only grey handle D/ Dilos 1H, ,40 red handle (VDE 0113) D/ Dilos 1H, ,50 Rotary handles for for direct mounting, suitable for cylindrical lock type Ronis, for Dilos only grey handle D/ Dilos 1H, ,70 red handle (VDE 0113) D/ Dilos 1H, ,80 grey handle D/ Dilos ,30 Rotary handles for direct mounting with interlocking possibility, for Fulos only grey handle D/ Fulos 000, ,80 red handle (VDE 0113) D/ Fulos 000, ,00 grey handle D/ Fulos 1, red handle (VDE 0113) D/ Fulos 1, Rotary handles for direct mounting with interlock possibility, for Dilos and Fulos black handle D/ Fulos 3S black handle D/ Dilos 6S (35 ka) black double grip D/ Dilos 6S, 7S, 8S, 9S grey handle D/ Fulos ,70 grey handle D/ Dilos ,00 Rotary handles with bypass, for Dilos and Fulos grey handle D/ Dilos 1H, 3, Fulos 000, ,70 grey handle, for cylindrical lock D/ Dilos 1H, 3, Fulos 000, ,00 grey handle, for neutral right D/ Dilos 1H, 3, Fulos 000, ,00 red handle D/ Dilos 1H, 3, Fulos 000, ,80 red handle, for cylindrical lock D/ Dilos 1H, 3, Fulos 000, ,00 red handle, for neutral right D/ Dilos 1H, 3, Fulos 000, ,10 Rotary handles with bypass, for Dilos and Fulos handle, shaft 300 mm and accessory for doors or enclosure IP 65 grey handle D/ Dilos 4, Fulos 1, ,00 grey handle, for neutral right D/ Dilos 4, Fulos 1, ,00 red handle D/ Dilos 4, Fulos 1, ,00 black handle D/ Dilos 6S (35 ka), Fulos 3S black handle (defeat mech.) D/ Dilos 6S (35 ka), Fulos 3S black double grip D/ Dilos 6S, 7S, 8S, 9S black double grip (defeat mech?.) D/ Dilos 6S, 7S, 8S, 9S grey double-grip D/ Fulos ,00 grey double-grip D/ Dilos ,00 Rotary handles for direct mounting with short shaft max. 55 mm, for Dilos and Fulos black handle D/ Dilos 1H, 3, Fulos 000, ,00 red handle D/ Dilos 1H, 3, Fulos 000, ,00 black handle D/ Dilos 4, Fulos 1, ,00 red handle D/ Dilos 4, Fulos 1, ,00 M 15

218 M Disconnector loadbreak switches Dilos and Fulos Changeover systems Description Catalogue-no. I e Designation Packing E-No./Ref.No. [A] units Changeover switch systems (I - O - II) Changeover system with grey handle, shaft 300 mm and accessories for mounting on doors and enclosure cover IP65, switches to be ordered separately Dilos 1H, Fulos 000 D/ ,00 Dilos 3, Fulos 00 D/ ,00 Dilos 4, Fulos 1-2 D/ ,00 Main changeover switches (I - O - II) Complete set including switch, shaft 300 mm and accessories for mounting on doors and enclosure covers. 3-pole D/ CO Dilos 6S pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ CO Dilos 7S pole D/ pole D/ CO Dilos 8S pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + N D/ pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ BS D ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 3-pole D/ Fulos ,00 3-pole + N D/ NH ,00 3-pole + fixed N D/ ,00 6 / 8 poles system 6 / 8 poles system with grey handle, shaft 300mm and accessories for mounting on door or enclosure cover IP65, switches to be ordered separately. Dilos 1H, Fulos 000 D/ ,00 Dilos 3, Fulos 00 D/ ,00 6P Dilos 6S 6-pole with transparent main D/ Dilos 6S - 6P contact cover and door interlock D/ handle IP65 D/ M 16

219 Disconnector loadbreak switches Dilos and Fulos M Accessories Description Catalogue-no. for series Packing E-No./Ref.No. units Plug-in cylindrical keylock Ronis 1104 D/ Dilos 1H, 3, ,00 Fulos Fiat D/ Dilos 6S - 9S, Dilos ,00 Fulos 3S, 4 Padlock system For direct handle D/ Dilos 6S, Fulos 3S D/ Dilos 7S, 8S (2000A) D/ Dilos 8S (2500A) D/ Dilos 9S Auxiliary contact 1 co D/ Dilos 1H, 3, ,90 2 co D/ Fulos ,80 1 co D/ Dilos 6S, 7S, 8S, 9S co D/ Dilos 6S, 7S, 8S, 9S co D/ Dilos 9, Fulos ,00 2 co D/ ,30 3 co D/ ,60 4 co D/ ,80 Auxiliary contact anticipated, to mount inside the switch 1 co D/ Dilos 1H, Fulos ,60 2 co D/ ,70 1 co D/ Dilos 3, Fulos ,60 2 co D/ ,70 1 NO P9B10VN Dilos 4, Fulos 1, ,38 1 NC P9B01VR (max. 3 HS) ,64 1 co D/ Dilos 9, Fulos ,43 2 co D/ ,90 Terminal covers long design 1 set (2 items) D/ Dilos 3, Fulos ,00 1 set (2 items) D/ Dilos 4, Fulos 1, ,10 1 upper D/ Dilos 6S, Fulos 3S lower D/ Dilos 6S, Fulos 3S transparent contact cover 3P D/ Dilos 6S, 7S, 8S, 9S transparent contact cover 3P D/ Dilos set (3 items, 1 per terminal) D/ Dilos 9, Fulos ,10 1 set (4 items, 1 per terminal) D/ ,80 M 17

220 M Disconnector loadbreak switches Dilos and Fulos Accessories Description Catalogue-no. for series Packing E-No./Ref.No. units Terminal covers short design 1 set (2 items) D/ Dilos 3, Fulos ,60 1 set (2 items) D/ Dilos 4, Fulos 1, ,80 Protection covers for fuses For 3 fuses D/ Fulos ,10 For 3 fuses D/ Fulos ,80 For 3 fuses D/ Fulos 1, For 1 fuse sealable D/ Fulos 3S ,30 For 1 fuse D/ Fulos ,60 Rear terminals 3 spacer terminals for Al/Cu 185mm 2 D/ Dilos 3, Fulos ,00 4 spacer terminals for Al/Cu 185mm 2 D/ ,00 3 spacer terminals for Al/Cu 240mm 2 D/ Dilos 4, Fulos 1, ,00 4 spacer terminals for Al/Cu 240mm 2 D/ ,00 Terminals including terminal cover 3 mantle terminals for Al/Cu 185mm 2 D/ Dilos 3, Fulos 00, ,20 4 mantle terminals for Al/Cu 185mm 2 D/ ,00 1 set (3 items) D/ ,00 1 set (4 items) D/ ,80 1 set (3 items) D/ Dilos 4, Fulos 1, ,00 1 set (4 items) D/ ,00 Inbus key Size 5, 200mm, insulated D/ Dilos 1, 2, 1H, Elos, ,50 Fulos Connection set For fuse detection D/ Fulos 3S M 18

221 Disconnector loadbreak switches Dilos and Fulos M Dilos S / Fulos S CO Dilos S Description Catalogue-no. I e Designation Packing Ref. no. [A] units Disconnectors with motor drive 3-pole D/ Dilos 6S MO pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ Dilos 7S MO pole D/ pole D/ Dilos 8S MO pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ Dilos 7S MO pole + N D/ pole - DIN - NH3 D/ Fulos 3S MO pole + N - DIN - NH3 D/ pole - BS C1-C2 D/ Fulos 3S MO pole - BS C3 D/ pole + N - BS C1-C2 D/ pole + N - BS C3 D/ Changeover disconnectors with motor drive 3-pole D/ CO Dilos 6S MO pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ CO Dilos 7S MO pole D/ pole D/ CO Dilos 8S MO pole D/ pole + N D/ pole + N D/ M 19

222 M Disconnector loadbreak switches Dilos and Fulos Dilos S Fulos S Description Catalogue-no. I e Designation Packing Ref. no. [A] units Disconnectors with trip indication switch 3-pole D/ Dilos 6S BA pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ pole D/ Dilos 7S BA pole D/ pole D/ Dilos 8S BA pole + N D/ pole - DIN - NH3 D/ Fulos 3S BA pole + N - DIN - NH3 D/ pole - BS C1-C2 D/ Fulos 3S BA pole - BS C3 D/ pole + N - BS C1-C2 D/ pole + N - BS C3 D/ M 20

223 Industrial enclosures S Industrial boxes in plastic MULTIBOX - NEW S 2 - S 5 APO S 6 - S 9 VMS S 10 - S 14 VJ-BOX S 15 - S 16 Industrial cabinets in plastic ARIA S 17 - S 18 POLYSAFE - NEW S 19 - S 24 Industrial cabinets in metal FeRIA wall mounting Sheetsteel S 25 - S 29 Stainless steel - NEW Depth 400 mm - NEW FeRIA SF floorstanding - NEW S 30 - S 35 Pedestals EH1 S 36 EH2 - NEW S 36 EH3/F S 37 EH3/AP S 37 EH3/DC S 38 EH3/GD-AP S 39 EH6 S 40 S 1

224 S Industrial enclosures MULTIBOX Small boxes Polycarbonate IP66 - IK08 With transparent With grey cover cover RAL 7035 Packing Ref. No. Ref. No. unit MB11 65 x 65 x 57 - With metric knock-outs MB11 65 x 65 x 81 - With metric knock-outs MB11 65 x 65 x 57 - Smooth MB11 65 x 65 x 81 - Smooth MB21 94 x 65 x 57 - With metric knock-outs MB21 94 x 65 x 81 - With metric knock-outs MB21 94 x 65 x 57 - Smooth MB21 94 x 65 x 81 - Smooth MB22 94 x 94 x 57 - With metric knock-outs MB22 94 x 94 x 81 - With metric knock-outs MB22 94 x 94 x 57 - Smooth MB22 94 x 94 x 81 - Smooth MB x 110 x 66 - With metric knock-outs MB x 110 x 90 - With metric knock-outs MB x 110 x 66 - Smooth MB x 110 x 90 - Smooth MB x 94 x 57 - With metric knock-outs MB x 94 x 81 - With metric knock-outs MB x 94 x 57 - Smooth MB x 94 x 81 - Smooth MB x 130 x 75 - With metric knock-outs MB x 130 x 99 - With metric knock-outs MB x 130 x 75 - Smooth MB x 130 x 99 - Smooth MB x 94 x 57 - With metric knock-outs MB x 94 x 81 - With metric knock-outs MB x 94 x 57 - Smooth MB x 94 x 81 - Smooth MB x 110 x 90 - With metric knock-outs MB x 110 x With metric knock-outs MB x 110 x With metric knock-outs MB x 110 x 90 - Smooth MB x 110 x Smooth MB x 110 x Smooth MB x 180 x 90 - With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x 90 - Smooth MB x 180 x 111- Smooth MB x 180 x Smooth MB x 180 x Smooth MB x 180 x 90 - With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x 90 - Smooth MB x 180 x 111- Smooth MB x 180 x Smooth MB x 180 x Smooth MB x 254 x With metric knock-outs MB x 254 x With metric knock-outs MB x 254 x With metric knock-outs MB x 254 x 111- Smooth MB x 254 x Smooth MB x 254 x Smooth S 2

225 Industrial enclosures S MULTIBOX Small boxes Polystyrene IP66 - IK07 With transparent With grey cover cover RAL 7035 Packing Ref. No. Ref. No. unit MB11 65 x 65 x 57 - With metric knock-outs MB11 65 x 65 x 81 - With metric knock-outs MB11 65 x 65 x 57 - Smooth MB11 65 x 65 x 81 - Smooth MB21 94 x 65 x 57 - With metric knock-outs MB21 94 x 65 x 81 - With metric knock-outs MB21 94 x 65 x 57 - Smooth MB21 94 x 65 x 81 - Smooth MB22 94 x 94 x 57 - With metric knock-outs MB22 94 x 94 x 81 - With metric knock-outs MB22 94 x 94 x 57 - Smooth MB22 94 x 94 x 81 - Smooth MB x 110 x 66 - With metric knock-outs MB x 110 x 90 - With metric knock-outs MB x 110 x 66 - Smooth MB x 110 x 90 - Smooth MB x 94 x 57 - With metric knock-outs MB x 94 x 81 - With metric knock-outs MB x 94 x 57 - Smooth MB x 94 x 81 - Smooth MB x 130 x 75 - With metric knock-outs MB x 130 x 99 - With metric knock-outs MB x 130 x 75 - Smooth MB x 130 x 99 - Smooth MB x 94 x 57 - With metric knock-outs MB x 94 x 81 - With metric knock-outs MB x 94 x 57 - Smooth MB x 94 x 81 - Smooth MB x 110 x 90 - With metric knock-outs MB x 110 x With metric knock-outs MB x 110 x With metric knock-outs MB x 110 x 90 - Smooth MB x 110 x Smooth MB x 110 x Smooth MB x 180 x 90 - With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x 90 - Smooth MB x 180 x 111- Smooth MB x 180 x Smooth MB x 180 x Smooth MB x 180 x 90 - With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x With metric knock-outs MB x 180 x 90 - Smooth MB x 180 x 111- Smooth MB x 180 x Smooth MB x 180 x Smooth MB x 254 x With metric knock-outs MB x 254 x With metric knock-outs MB x 254 x With metric knock-outs MB x 254 x 111- Smooth MB x 254 x Smooth MB x 254 x Smooth S 3

226 S Industrial enclosures MULTIBOX Accessories Packing unit Ref. No. Mounting plate (insulated) 45 x 45 mm x 45 mm x 74 mm x 90 mm x 74mm x 110 mm x 74 mm x 90 mm x 150 mm x 150 mm x 220 mm DIN profile 35 x 7,5 x 1 L = 81 long/short side MB L = 106 long side MB L = 106 long/short side MB L = 144 long side MB L = 216 long side MB L = 336 long side MB DIN profile 15 x 5 x 1 L = 49,5 long/short side MB L = 49,5 short side MB L = 80 long side MB L = 80 long/short side MB L = 92 long/short side MB L = 111 long side MB L = 111 long/short side MB L = 154 long side MB Partition plates For full compartmentalisation in one box 88 x 49 mm - MB 42: inside depth 45 mm - MB 52: inside depth 45 mm x 73 mm - MB 42: inside depth 69 mm - MB 52: inside depth 69 mm Combi set For joining several boxes horizontal and/or vertical small M small M small M lange from MB 53 on S 4

227 Industrial enclosures S MULTIBOX Accessories Packing unit Ref. No. Hinges Converts removable covers into hinged covers. (incl. drilling template) small up to MB lange from MN 53 on Wall mounting brackets For external mounting of all Multiboxes 1 set = 4 pieces Padlock For protection against unauthorised access Available from MB 65 on Spacers In plastic (6 + 8 mm), determines the distance between PC-boards or mounting plates and the base of the box 1 set = 8 pieces (incl. fixing screws) Available for all Multiboxes Drilling template Aids drilling, setting the required min. spacing, maximum number of holes and box positioning Thumb grip For fixing on to cover screws. Available for all Multiboxes 1 set = 4 pieces Carrying handle Used with Multiboxes for portable purposes (plastic, bleu). with plastic screws with self-tapping screws Double membrane nipple IP66 Special plastic material (elastic and temperature-resistant) Secure fitting without locknut, two integrated sealing membranes. M M M M Air vent (IPx4) To allow ventilation and prevent condensation. Air vents are preferably mounted in the upper and lower part of the box. M S 5

228 S Industrial enclosures APO Modular polyester boxes IP67/IP44 - IK10 Packing unit Ref. No. Boxes With polyester cover - IP67 APO 1 box 185 x 150 x APO 31 box 300 x 185 x APO 41 box 300 x 300 x APO 71 box 370 x 300 x APO 51 box 485 x 300 x APO 81 box 555 x 300 x APO 61 box 600 x 300 x APO 11 box 600 x 370 x APO 12 box 600 x 600 x With polycarbonate cover - IP66 APO 1 box 185 x 150 x APO 31 box 300 x 185 x APO 41 box 300 x 300 x APO 71 box 370 x 300 x APO 51 box 485 x 300 x APO 81 box 555 x 300 x APO 61 box 600 x 300 x APO 11 box 600 x 370 x APO 12 box 600 x 600 x With hinged transparent cover - IP67 APO 31 box 300 x 185 x APO 41 box 300 x 300 x APO 71 box 370 x 300 x APO 51 box 485 x 300 x APO 61 box 600 x 300 x Bases With plain sides APO 1 box 185 x 150 x APO 31 box 300 x 185 x APO 41 box 300 x 300 x APO 71 box 370 x 300 x APO 51 box 485 x 300 x APO 81 box 555 x 300 x APO 61 box 600 x 300 x APO 11 box 600 x 370 x APO 12 box 600 x 600 x With two open sides APO 31 box 300 x 185 x APO 41 box 300 x 300 x APO 71 box 370 x 300 x APO 51 box 485 x 300 x APO 81 box 555 x 300 x APO 61 box 600 x 300 x APO 11 box 600 x 370 x APO 12 box 600 x 600 x With four open sides APO 31 box 300 x 185 x APO 41 box 300 x 300 x APO 71 box 370 x 300 x APO 51 box 485 x 300 x APO 81 box 555 x 300 x APO 61 box 600 x 300 x APO 11 box 600 x 370 x APO 12 box 600 x 600 x S 6

229 Industrial enclosures S APO Modular polyester boxes IP67/IP44 - IK10 Packing unit Ref. No. Covers Opaque grey in polyester APO 1 cover 185 x 150 x APO 31 cover 300 x 185 x APO 41 cover 300 x 300 x APO 71 cover 370 x 300 x APO 51 cover 485 x 300 x APO 81 cover 555 x 300 x APO 61 cover 600 x 300 x APO 11 cover 600 x 370 x APO 12 cover 600 x 600 x Transparent in polycarbonate APO 1 cover 185 x 150 x APO 31 cover 300 x 185 x APO 41 cover 300 x 300 x APO 71 cover 370 x 300 x APO 51 cover 485 x 300 x APO 81 cover 555 x 300 x APO 61 cover 600 x 300 x APO 61 cover 600 x 300 x APO 11 cover 600 x 370 x APO 12 cover 600 x 600 x Hinged - transparent APO 31 cover 300 x 185 x APO 41 cover 300 x 300 x APO 71 cover 370 x 300 x APO 51 cover 485 x 300 x APO 61 cover 600 x 300 x APO 11 cover 600 x 370 x Depth extension frames Glass fibre reinforced polyamide PA6 APO x 150 x APO x 185 x APO x 300 x APO x 300 x APO x 300 x APO x 300 x APO x 370 x APO x 600 x S 7

230 S Industrial enclosures APO Modular polyester boxes IP67/IP44 - IK10 Packing unit Ref. No. Mounting plates Pertinax 5 mm APO x 105 x APO x 139 x APO x 228 x APO x 254 x APO x 254 x APO x 254 x APO x 254 x APO x 324 x APO x 555 x Sendzimir zinc coated sheet steel 2 mm APO x 99 x APO x 134 x APO x 249 x APO x 249 x APO x 249 x APO x 249 x APO x 249 x APO x 319 x APO x 550 x Perforated 1.5 mm APO x 99 x APO x 134 x APO x 249 x APO x 249 x APO x 249 x APO x 249 x APO x 249 x APO x 319 x APO x 550 x Coupling frames For side For side For side Bridges Fits the 300 mm side Fits the 370 mm side Blind end-plates in polyester Bushing end-plates in polyester Combi end-plates in polystyrene For side For side For side For side x PG x PG x PG For side x PG For side x PG For side x PG x PG21/ For side x PG x PG16/ x PG21/ For side x PG For side x PG29/ x PG For side x PG For side x PG For side x PG For side x PG x PG16/ x PG21/ For side x PG S 8

231 Industrial enclosures S APO Modular polyester boxes IP67/IP44 - IK10 Cable-end boxes Rubber cable sleeves Cable clamps Hinges Other accessories Max Ø cable Packing Ref. No. (mm) unit APO 31 - side polyester 1 x APO 31 - side polyester 2 x APO 41 - side polyester 1 x APO 37 - side polyester 3 x Funnel-shaped polystyrene - side x For funnel-shaped cable-end box - max. ) cable: 49 mm For use as a sealing gland - max. ) cable: 75 mm For direct mounting to cable-end box - max. ) cable: 75 mm Universal stress relieving clamp - max. ) cable: 75 mm For mounting to univ. stress relieving att. - max. ) cable: 75 mm Type A Type B Type C Type D Type E Type F Mounting brackets In glass fibre reinforced polyamide In stainless steel Cover fixing screws Triangular TTR sealing screws Threaded inserts M4 Dodge type M6 Dodge type M4 special tool for securing M Thumb grip (set of two pieces) Sealing plate Hinge screw (set of two pieces) Padlocking set Spanner for triangle TTR sealing screws Air vents - set of two pieces in polyamide Safety lock With two keys V 2432E With square key 8 mm With triangular key 8 mm With triangular key 11 mm With double-bit yale key 3 mm S 9

232 S Industrial enclosures VMS Modular plastic enclosures system IP65 - IK07 Packing unit Ref. No. Bases With four open sides VMS x 220 x VMS x 320 x VMS x 320 x VMS x 320 x VMS x 440 x Transparent covers With slotted screws VMS x 220 x VMS x 320 x VMS x 320 x VMS x 320 x VMS x 440 x Opaque covers With slotted screws VMS x 220 x VMS x 320 x VMS x 320 x VMS x 320 x VMS x 440 x Hinged covers With double closure system VMS x 320 x VMS x 320 x Depth extension frames With fixing screws VMS x 220 x VMS x 320 x VMS x 320 x VMS x 320 x VMS x 440 x S 10

233 Industrial enclosures S VMS Modular plastic enclosures system IP65 - IK07 Packing unit Ref. No. Mounting plates Metal 2 mm VMS x 160 x 2 1/ VMS x 260 x 2 1/ VMS x 260 x 2 1/ VMS x 260 x 2 1/ VMS x 380 x 2 1/ Pertinax 5 mm VMS x 160 x 5 1/ VMS x 260 x 5 1/ VMS x 260 x 5 1/ VMS x 260 x 5 1/ VMS x 380 x 5 1/ Plain cover plates Insulated material 2 mm VMS x 201 x 2 1/ VMS x 301 x 2 1/ VMS x 301 x 2 1/ VMS x 301 x 2 1/ VMS x 421 x 2 1/ End plates Blind end plates For side 220 mm 1/ For side 320 mm 1/ For side 440 mm 1/ Combi end plates For side 220 mm - 3 x PG29 1/ For side 220 mm - 1 x PG x PG16 1/ For side 320 mm - 6 x PG29 1/ For side 320 mm - 3 x PG x PG16 1/ For side 320 mm - 22 x PG13.5 1/ For side 320 mm - 4 x PG x PG x PG16 1/ For side 320 mm - 16 x PG16 1/ For side 320 mm - 8 x PG x PG16 1/ For side 440 mm - 26 x PG16 1/ For side 440 mm - 4 x PG x PG x PG16 1/ Cable entries Cable stress releases Cable clamp Bridges Coupling key ) max. of cable: 2 x 75 mm 1/ ) max. of cable: 3 x 75 mm 1/ With one clamp For side 320 mm - ) max. of cable: 75 mm 1/ For side 440 mm - ) max. of cable: 75 mm 1/ To mount on cable stress release ) max. of cable: 75 mm For large cross-section cables For side 320 mm For side 440 mm For base coupling Coupling key S 11

234 S Industrial enclosures VMS Modular plastic enclosures system IP65 - IK07 Packing unit Ref. No. Coupling set 2 x 220 Coupling clamp Universal support Symmetrical DIN-profiles Mounting rails 12 x 2 mm Partition plates To couple 2 sides of 220 mm to one side of 440 mm With mounting accessories For coupling in special cases Coupling clamp Support Always supplied with two universal supports For side 220 mm For side 320 mm For side 440 mm To fit connection terminal blocks For side 220 mm - always supplied with two universal supports For side 320 mm - always supplied with two universal supports For side 440 mm - always supplied with two universal supports For full compartimentalisation of coupled bases For side 220 mm For side 320 mm For side 440 mm Other accessories Fixing brackets stainless steel Air vent - set of two pieces Hinge screw - set of two pieces Hinge - set of two pieces Thumb grip - set of four pieces Self-tapping screws For fixation in the base 5 x For fixation in the base 5 x For fixation in the base 5 x Screws To fasten components to metallic mounting plates 6 x To fasten components to metallic mounting plates 6 x S 12

235 Industrial enclosures S VMS Premounted units for panelboards Packing unit Ref. No. Enclosures for modular equipment VMS modules 320 x 220 x VMS modules 320 x 320 x VMS modules 440 x 320 x VMS modules 640 x 320 x Enclosures with H.R.C. fuse plates VMS A - 3 DIN 00 + N x 220 x VMS A - 3 DIN 00 + N x 320 x VMS A - 3 DIN 1 + N x 320 x VMS A - 3 DIN 2 + N x 320 x VMS A - 3 DIN 3 + N x 320 x Enclosures for loadbreak switches and fused disconnector loadbreak switches (Dilos/Fulos) VMS 32 - Dilos 1-40/63/80/100/125A - 3P/4P VMS 33 - Dilos 2-160/200A - 3P/4P VMS 33 - Dilos 1H - 40/63/125A - 3P/4P VMS 43 - Dilos 3-160/200/250/315A - 3P/4P VMS 64 - Dilos 4-400/500/630A - 3P/4P VMS 33 - Fulos /63/100A - 3P/4P VMS 43 - Fulos A - 3P/4P VMS 64 - Fulos 1-250A - 3P/4P VMS 64 - Fulos 2-400A - 3P/4P Enclosures for loadbreak switches and fuse bases VMS 32 - Dilos 1-40/63/80A - 3P/4P + - E27/E33 MCB VMS 43 - Dilos 1-63/80/100/125A - 3P/4P DIN 00 + N VMS 43 - Dilos 2-160A - 3P/4P DIN 00 + N S 13

236 S Industrial enclosures VMS Premounted units for panelboards Packing unit Ref. No. Enclosures for changeover switches (Dilos/Fulos) VMS 63 - Dilos 1H - 125A - 3P/4P VMS 64 - Dilos 3-160/200/250/315A - 3P/4P VMS 63 - Fulos /63/100A - 3P/4P VMS 64 - Fulos A - 3P/4P Enclosures for MCCB's with thumbleknob (Record) VMS 33 - MCL 128N 3/4P 320 x 320 x VMS 33 - MCL 128NM 3/4P 320 x 320 x VMS 43 - MCL 168N/S 3/4P 440 x 320 x VMS 63 - MCL 168N/S+M160 3/4P 640 x 320 x VMS 63 - MCL 258N/S 3/4P 640 x 320 x VMS 63 - MCL 258N/S+M250 3/4P 640 x 320 x VMS 63 - MCL 408N/S/H 3/4P 640 x 320 x VMS 63 - MCL 408N/S/H+M400 3/4P 640 x 320 x VMS 64 - MCL 638N/S/H 3/4P 640 x 440 x VMS 64 - MCL 638N/S/H+M400 3/4P 640 x 440 x S 14

237 Industrial enclosures S VJ-BOX Polyester boxes IP67/IP66 Packing unit Ref. No. Boxes With polyester cover - fixing by screws VJ x 186 x VJ x 186 x VJ x 236 x VJ x 287 x VJ x 338 x VJ x 389 x VJ x 440 x With hinged cover - stainless-steel hinges VJ x 186 x VJ x 186 x VJ x 236 x VJ x 287 x VJ x 338 x VJ x 389 x VJ x 440 x With hinged cover - plastic hinges VJ x 186 x VJ x 186 x VJ x 236 x VJ x 287 x VJ x 338 x VJ x 389 x VJ x 440 x Boxes with raised cover With polyester cover - fixing by screws VJ x 236 x VJ x 287 x VJ x 338 x VJ x 389 x With hinged cover - stainless-steel hinges VJ x 236 x VJ x 287 x VJ x 338 x VJ x 389 x With hinged cover - plastic hinges VJ x 236 x VJ x 287 x VJ x 338 x VJ x 389 x S 15

238 S Industrial enclosures VJ-BOX Polyester boxes IP67/IP66 Packing unit Ref. No. Mounting plates Metal sheet steel 2 mm VJ x 124 x VJ x 124 x VJ x 175 x VJ x 226 x VJ x 276 x VJ x 327 x VJ x 378 x Accessories Hinges Plastic - set of two pieces Surface-mounted windows Screwed IP x Screwed IP67 with indication strip x Screwed IP67 without indication strip x Air vents Polyamide - set of two pieces S 16

239 Industrial enclosures S ARIA Universal polyester cabinets IP66 - IK10 Packing unit Ref. No. Cabinets With plain door ARIA 32 cabinet 300 x 200 x ARIA 43 cabinet 400 x 300 x ARIA 54 cabinet 500 x 400 x ARIA 64 cabinet 600 x 400 x ARIA 75 cabinet 700 x 500 x ARIA 86 cabinet 800 x 600 x ARIA 108 cabinet 1000 x 800 x With glazed door ARIA 43 cabinet 400 x 300 x ARIA 54 cabinet 500 x 400 x ARIA 64 cabinet 600 x 400 x ARIA 75 cabinet 700 x 500 x ARIA 86 cabinet 800 x 600 x ARIA 108 cabinet 1000 x 800 x Mounting plates Mounting frames In pertinax 5 mm ARIA 32 mounting plate 250 x 150 x ARIA 43 mounting plate 350 x 250 x ARIA 54 mounting plate 450 x 350 x ARIA 64 mounting plate 550 x 350 x ARIA 75 mounting plate 650 x 450 x ARIA 86 mounting plate 750 x 550 x ARIA 108 mounting plate 950 x 750 x In sendzimir zinc coated sheet steel 2 mm ARIA 32 mounting plate 250 x 150 x ARIA 43 mounting plate 350 x 250 x ARIA 54 mounting plate 450 x 350 x ARIA 64 mounting plate 550 x 350 x ARIA 75 mounting plate 650 x 450 x ARIA 86 mounting plate 750 x 550 x ARIA 108 mounting plate 950 x 750 x Perforated sheet steel 1.5 mm ARIA 32 mounting plate 250 x 150 x ARIA 43 mounting plate 350 x 250 x ARIA 54 mounting plate 450 x 350 x ARIA 64 mounting plate 550 x 350 x ARIA 75 mounting plate 650 x 450 x ARIA 86 mounting plate 750 x 550 x ARIA 108 mounting plate 950 x 750 x ARIA 32 mounting frame 2 rows ARIA 43 mounting frame 2 rows ARIA 54 mounting frame 3 rows ARIA 64 mounting frame 3 rows ARIA 75 mounting frame 4 rows ARIA 86 mounting frame 4 rows ARIA 108 mounting frame 5 rows S 17

240 S Industrial enclosures ARIA Universal polyester cabinets IP66 - IK10 Packing unit Ref. No. Cover plates Plain plates ARIA 32 cover plate ARIA 43 cover plate ARIA 54 cover plate ARIA 64 cover plate ARIA 75 cover plate ARIA 86 cover plate ARIA 108 cover plate With openings for DIN-rail equipment ARIA 32 plate for DIN-rail equipment ARIA 43 plate for DIN-rail equipment ARIA 54 plate for DIN-rail equipment ARIA 64 plate for DIN-rail equipment ARIA 75 plate for DIN-rail equipment ARIA 86 plate for DIN-rail equipment ARIA 108 plate for DIN-rail equipment Rail for terminal blocks Rail for terminal blocks ARIA Rail for terminal blocks ARIA Rail for terminal blocks ARIA 54/ Rail for terminal blocks ARIA Rail for terminal blocks ARIA Rail for terminal blocks ARIA Other accessories Set hinge supports Set fixing lugs polyamide Set fixing lugs stainless steel Set ventilation grids Neutral handle Handle Handle for profile half cylinder Handle for profile half cylinder for padlocking Triangular 8 lock core Square lock 8 mm Triangular 11 lock core Double-bit lock core Nuts M Nuts M Nuts M Pocket for drawing S 18

241 Industrial enclosures S POLYSAFE Universal polyester cabinets Packing unit Ref. No. Factory-assembled cabinet Complete with handle and wall mounting brackets of AISI 304 stainless steel. (Without cilinder lock) * With transparent polycarbonate window Mounting plates Plain door IP65 - IK10 PS 220 cabinet 500 x PS 230 cabinet 500 x PS 320 cabinet 750 x PS 330 cabinet 750 x PS 340 cabinet 750 x PS 352 cabinet 750 x PS 420 cabinet 1000 x PS 430 cabinet 1000 x PS 440 cabinet 1000 x PS 442 cabinet 1000 x PS 452 cabinet 1000 x PS 530 cabinet 1250 x PS 542 cabinet 1250 x PS 546 cabinet 1250 x Glazed door IP55 - IK7 * PS 220 cabinet 500 x PS 230 cabinet 500 x PS 320 cabinet 750 x PS 330 cabinet 750 x PS 340 cabinet 750 x PS 352 cabinet 750 x PS 420 cabinet 1000 x PS 430 cabinet 1000 x PS 440 cabinet 1000 x PS 442 cabinet 1000 x PS 452 cabinet 1000 x PS 530 cabinet 1250 x PS 542 cabinet 1250 x PS 546 cabinet 1250 x Sendzimir zinc coated sheet steel 2 mm PS 220 mounting plate 500 x 500 (390 x 390) PS 230 mounting plate 500 x 750 (390 x 640) PS 320 mounting plate 750 x 500 (640 x 390) PS 330 mounting plate 750 x 750 (640 x 640) PS 340 mounting plate 750 x 1000 (640 x 890) PS 352 mounting plate 750 x 1250 (640 x 1140) PS 420 mounting plate 1000 x 500 (890 x 390) PS 430 mounting plate 1000 x 750 (890 x 640) PS 440 mounting plate 1000 x 1000 (890 x 890) PS 442 mounting plate 1000 x 1000 (890 x 890) PS 452 mounting plate 1000 x 1250 (890 x 1140) PS 530 mounting plate 1250 x 750 (1140 x 640) PS 542 mounting plate 1250 x 1000 (1140 x 890) PS 546 mounting plate 1250 x 1000 (1140 x 890) Pertinax 5 mm PS 220 mounting plate 500 x 500 (390 x 390) PS 230 mounting plate 500 x 750 (390 x 640) PS 320 mounting plate 750 x 500 (640 x 390) PS 330 mounting plate 750 x 750 (640 x 640) PS 340 mounting plate 750 x 1000 (640 x 890) PS 352 mounting plate 750 x 1250 (640 x 1140) PS 420 mounting plate 1000 x 500 (890 x 390) PS 430 mounting plate 1000 x 750 (890 x 640) PS 440 mounting plate 1000 x 1000 (890 x 890) PS 442 mounting plate 1000 x 1000 (890 x 890) PS 452 mounting plate 1000 x 1250 (890 x 1140) PS 530 mounting plate 1250 x 750 (1140 x 640) PS 542 mounting plate 1250 x 1000 (1140 x 890) PS 546 mounting plate 1250 x 1000 (1140 x 890) S 19

242 S Industrial enclosures POLYSAFE Universal polyester cabinets Packing unit Ref. No. Mounting plates Mounting frame in ALU Consisting out of: four attachment brackets, two vertical C profiles (horizontal profiles to be ordered separately: see accessories) Sendzimir zinc coated sheet steel perforated 2 mm PS 220 mounting plate 500 x 500 (390 x 390) PS 230 mounting plate 500 x 750 (390 x 640) PS 320 mounting plate 750 x 500 (640 x 390) PS 330 mounting plate 750 x 750 (640 x 640) PS 340 mounting plate 750 x 1000 (640 x 890) PS 352 mounting plate 750 x 1250 (640x 1140) PS 420 mounting plate 1000 x 500 (890 x 390) PS 430 mounting plate 1000 x 750 (890 x 640) PS 440 mounting plate 1000 x 1000 (890 x 890) PS 442 mounting plate 1000 x 1000 (890 x 890) PS 452 mounting plate 1000 x 1250 (890 x 1140) PS 530 mounting plate 1250 x 750 (1140 x 640) PS 542 mounting plate 1250 x 1000 (1140 x 890) PS 546 mounting plate 1250 x 1000 (1140 x 890) Continuously adjustable PS 220 mounting frame 500 x PS 230 mounting frame 500 x PS 320 mounting frame 750 x PS 330 mounting frame 750 x PS 340 mounting frame 750 x PS 352 mounting frame 750 x PS 420 mounting frame 1000 x PS 430 mounting frame 1000 x PS 440 mounting frame 1000 x PS 442 mounting frame 1000 x PS 452 mounting frame 1000 x PS 530 mounting frame 1250 x PS 542 mounting frame 1250 x PS 546 mounting frame 1250 x Adjustable in steps 12,5 mm PS 220 mounting frame 500 x 500, length of horizontal profile PS 230 mounting frame 500 x 750, length of horizontal profile PS 320 mounting frame 750 x 500, length of horizontal profile PS 330 mounting frame 750 x 750, length of horizontal profile PS 340 mounting frame 750 x 1000, length of horizontal profile PS 352 mounting frame 750 x 1250, length of horizontal profile PS 420 mounting frame 1000 x 500, length of horizontal profile PS 430 mounting frame 1000 x 750, length of horizontal profile PS 440 mounting frame 1000 x 1000, length of horizontal profile PS 442 mounting frame 1000 x 1000, length of horizontal profile PS 452 mounting frame 1000 x 1250, length of horizontal profile PS 530 mounting frame 1250 x 750, length of horizontal profile PS 542 mounting frame 1250 x 1000, length of horizontal profile PS 546 mounting frame 1250 x 1000, length of horizontal profile Depth extension kit To increase the standard depth 320 mm of the cabinet up to 640 mm. The kit consists out of two side panels, one top and bottom panel, two open backpanels. PS 220 depth extension kit 500 x PS 230 depth extension kit 500 x PS 320 depth extension kit 750 x PS 330 depth extension kit 750 x PS 340 depth extension kit 750 x PS 352 depth extension kit 750 x PS 420 depth extension kit 1000 x PS 430 depth extension kit 1000 x PS 440 depth extension kit 1000 x PS 442 depth extension kit 1000 x PS 452 depth extension kit 1000 x PS 530 depth extension kit 1250 x PS 542 depth extension kit 1250 x PS 546 depth extension kit 1250 x S 20

243 Industrial enclosures S POLYSAFE Universal polyester cabinets Packing unit Ref. No. Rainhood For an efficient ventilation (IP44/IP54) in outdoor use by drilling holes in the top panel. As the standard enclosure is IP65 a rainhood is not necessary. PS 220 rainhood 500 x PS 230 rainhood 500 x PS 320 rainhood 750 x PS 330 rainhood 750 x PS 340 rainhood 750 x PS 352 rainhood 750 x PS 420 rainhood 1000 x PS 430 rainhood 1000 x PS 440 rainhood 1000 x PS 442 rainhood 1000 x PS 452 rainhood 1000 x PS 530 rainhood 1250 x PS 542 rainhood 1250 x PS 546 rainhood 1250 x Base Base or floor mounting frame. Cabinet and base are anchored together in the flooring. PS 220 base 500 x PS 230 base 500 x PS 320 base 750 x PS 330 base 750 x PS 340 base 750 x PS 352 base 750 x PS 420 base 1000 x PS 430 base 1000 x PS 440 base 1000 x PS 442 base 1000 x PS 452 base 1000 x PS 530 base 1250 x PS 542 base 1250 x PS 546 base 1250 x Adaptor frame for DIN-base mounting Cabinet and adaptor frame are anchored together on the DIN base (Polyester or concrete) PS 230 adaptor frame for DIN-base mounting 500 x PS 330 adaptor frame for DIN-base mounting 750 x PS 340 adaptor frame for DIN-base mounting 750 x PS 430 adaptor frame for DIN-base mounting 1000 x PS 440 adaptor frame for DIN-base mounting 1000 x PS 442 adaptor frame for DIN-base mounting 1000 x PS 530 adaptor frame for DIN-base mounting 1250 x PS 542 adaptor frame for DIN-base mounting 1250 x PS 546 adaptor frame for DIN-base mounting 1250 x Handles For profile half cylinder locks (as replacement) For two profile half cylinder locks Padlocking handle S 21

244 S Industrial enclosures POLYSAFE Accessories Packing unit Ref. No. Profile half cylinder locks D = 40 mm - L = 30.5 mm D = 45 mm - L = 35.5 mm (only on demand*) Door stop Canopy stop 100 opening angle of the door or the canopy. Profile half cylinder lock with 2 keys V2432-E Profile half cylinder lock with 2 keys 1242-E Profile half cylinder lock with 2 keys 455-E Profile half cylinder lock with 2 keys 405-E Profile half cylinder lock with 1 square key 6 mm Profile half cylinder lock with 1 square key 8 mm Profile half cylinder lock with 1 trangular key 8 mm Profile half cylinder lock with 1 triangular key 11 mm Profile half cylinder lock with 1 double-bit key 3 mm Door/canopy - left Door/canopy - right Depth adjustment kit Set of four brackets for depth adjustment of mounting plate (step 12.5 mm) Depth bracket mounting plate Wall mounting brackets Standard cabinets Kit of four brackets for clip fixation at the rear of the cabinet Made of stainless steel type 304 (as replacement) Cabinets with rainhood Kit of four special brackets for clip fixation at the rear of the cabinet S 22

245 Industrial enclosures S POLYSAFE Accessories Packing unit Ref. No. Pole mounting At the rear of the enclosure, C-profiles are mounted on the wall mounting brackets. Around the pole, a steel holding band is installed. On the C-profiles, clamps are placed to catch the holding band securely. Document pocket Set for pool mounting 500 mm width Set for pool mounting 750 mm width Selfadhesive - for DIN A5 documents W = 210 mm - H = 130 mm Coupling kit Vertical and/or lateral coupling. Package includes the neopreen gasket, coupling bolts and nuts, and the protection profiles. Coupling kit vertical and/or lateral 500 D Coupling kit vertical and/or lateral 750 D Coupling kit vertical and/or lateral 1000 D Coupling kit vertical and/or lateral 1250 D Corner profile To fill up the corner between two coupled enclosures Length = 308 mm Use 2 profiles when coupling 4 enclosures. Coverplate Mounted in front of mounting plate or mounting frame. 3 mm PVC sheet RAL 7035 Coverplate 500 x Coverplate 750 x Coverplate 750 x Coverplate 1000 x Coverplate 1000 x Coverplate 1000 x Coverplate 1250 x Coverplate 1250 x mm transparent sheet Coverplate 500 x Coverplate 750 x Coverplate 750 x Coverplate 1000 x Coverplate 1000 x Coverplate 1000 x Coverplate 1250 x Coverplate 1250 x S 23

246 S Industrial enclosures POLYSAFE Accessories Packing unit Ref. No. Ventilation Louvre plate Fits on ventilation opening. Package includes 2 grids and 4 nylon nails Louvre plate Air vents Kit of 2 pieces in polyamide. Two air vents must be mounted per enclosure to ensure sufficient air circulation and prevent condensation water. Complete with template and screws. Air vents are preferably mounted in the upper and lower part of the enclosure. Air vents Innerdoor IP20 Frame and door with 2 double-bit locks. For controls and automation applications. Coverplate hinged 500 x Coverplate hinged 500 x Coverplate hinged 750 x Coverplate hinged 750 x Coverplate hinged 1000 x Coverplate hinged 1000 x S 24

247 Industrial enclosures S FeRIA Sheet steel wall mounting cabinets IP65/55 - IK10 Packing unit Ref. No. Cabinets with plain door IP65 1-point closing system Wall mounting cabinet 300 x 200 x Wall mounting cabinet 300 x 300 x Wall mounting cabinet 300 x 400 x Wall mounting cabinet 400 x 300 x Wall mounting cabinet 400 x 400 x Wall mounting cabinet 400 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 500 x 400 x Wall mounting cabinet 500 x 500 x Wall mounting cabinet 500 x 500 x point closing system Wall mounting cabinet 600 x 400 x Wall mounting cabinet 600 x 400 x Wall mounting cabinet 600 x 500 x Wall mounting cabinet 600 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 600 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 800 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 800 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 800 x 800 x Wall mounting cabinet 800 x 800 x Wall mounting cabinet 1000 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 1000 x 800 x Wall mounting cabinet 1200 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 1200 x 800 x point closing system - double door - IP55 Wall mounting cabinet 800 x 1000 x Wall mounting cabinet 1000 x 1000 x Wall mounting cabinet 1200 x 1000 x Cabinets with glazed door IP55 1-point closing system Wall mounting cabinet 400 x 400 x Wall mounting cabinet 400 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 400 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 500 x 400 x point closing system Wall mounting cabinet 600 x 400 x Wall mounting cabinet 600 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 800 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 1000 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 1000 x 800 x Wall mounting cabinet 1200 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 1200 x 800 x S 25

248 S Industrial enclosures FeRIA Sheet steel wall mounting cabinets IP65/55 - IK10 Packing unit Ref. No. Mounting plates Sendzimir zinc plated sheet steel 2.5 mm Mounting plate 300 x Mounting plate 300 x Mounting plate 400 x Mounting plate 400 x Mounting plate 500 x Mounting plate 500 x Mounting plate 600 x Mounting plate 600 x Mounting plate 600 x Mounting plate 800 x Mounting plate 800 x Mounting plate 1000 x Mounting plate 1000 x Mounting plate 1000 x Mounting plate 1200 x Mounting plate 1200 x Mounting plate 1200 x Perforated sheet steel 1.5 mm Mounting plate 300 x Mounting plate 300 x Mounting plate 300 x Mounting plate 400 x Mounting plate 400 x Mounting plate 400 x Mounting plate 500 x Mounting plate 500 x Mounting plate 600 x Mounting plate 600 x Mounting plate 600 x Mounting plate 800 x Mounting plate 800 x Mounting plate 800 x Mounting plate 1000 x Mounting plate 1000 x Mounting plate 1000 x Mounting plate 1200 x Mounting plate 1200 x Mounting plate 1200 x Inner door Inner door 400 x Inner door 500 x Inner door 600 x Inner door 800 x Inner door 1000 x Inner door 1000 x Inner door 1200 x Inner door 1200 x Trunking support rails for door Trunking support rails for door 300 mm Trunking support rails for door 400 mm Trunking support rails for door 500 mm Trunking support rails for door 600 mm Trunking support rails for door 800 mm S 26

249 Industrial enclosures S FeRIA Sheet steel wall mounting cabinets IP65/55 - IK10 Packing unit Ref. No. Modular framework for DIN-rail equipment Modular framework 300 x Modular framework 400 x Modular framework 500 x Modular framework 600 x Modular framework 600 x Modular framework 800 x Modular framework 1000 x Modular framework 1200 x Blind coverplate, plain, width 400 mm Blind coverplate, plain, width 600 mm Swing frames 19" IP20 Swing frame 19" 3 height units 400 x Swing frame 19" 6 height units 400 x Swing frame 19" 9 height units 600 x Swing frame 19" 12 height units 800 x Swing frame 19" 15 height units 800 x Roofs Roof 400 x Roof 400 x Roof 500 x Roof 600 x Roof 600 x Roof 800 x Locks 3 mm 7 mm 8 mm G 9233 Other accessories Handle without lock Handle with lock Lock, double bit key 3 mm Lock, square key 7 mm Lock, triangular key 8 mm Lock, G Handle for cabinets with rod closing device, without lock Handle for cabinets with rod closing device, double bit 3 mm Handle for cabinets with rod closing device, lock Handle for cabinets with rod closing device, square 7 mm Handle for cabinets with rod closing device, triangle 8 mm Cable entry plate 158 x Cable entry plate 258 x Cable entry plate 358 x Cable entry plate 558 x Doorstop Depth adjustment kit, 200 mm Depth adjustment kit, 250 mm Depth adjustment kit, 300 mm Wall mounting brackets (set of four pieces) S 27

250 S Industrial enclosures FeRIA Stainless steel wall mounting cabinets IP65 - IK10 Packing unit Ref. No. Cabinets with plain door IP65 Wall mounting cabinet 300 x 200 x Wall mounting cabinet 300 x 400 x Wall mounting cabinet 400 x 300 x Wall mounting cabinet 400 x 300 x Wall mounting cabinet 400 x 400 x Wall mounting cabinet 500 x 500 x Wall mounting cabinet 600 x 400 x Wall mounting cabinet 600 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 600 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 800 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 800 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 800 x 800 x Wall mounting cabinet 1000 x 800 x Wall mounting cabinet 1200 x 800 x Other accessories Wall mounting brackets (set of four pieces) S 28

251 Industrial enclosures S FeRIA Sheet steel wall mounting cabinets Depth 400 Packing unit Ref. No. Cabinets with plain door IP65 * Cabinets with double door Mounting plates for cabinets with rod closing system 2-point closing system Wall mounting cabinet 600 x 400 x Wall mounting cabinet 600 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 800 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 1000 x 600 x Rod closing system Wall mounting cabinet 1200 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 1200 x 800 x Wall mounting cabinet 1200 x 1000 x * Wall mounting cabinet 1200 x 1200 x * Wall mounting cabinet 1400 x 600 x Wall mounting cabinet 1400 x 800 x Wall mounting cabinet 1400 x 1000 x * Wall mounting cabinet 1400 x 1200 x * Plain sheet steel Mounting plate 1200 x Mounting plate 1200 x Mounting plate 1200 x Mounting plate 1200 x Mounting plate 1400 x Mounting plate 1400 x Mounting plate 1400 x Mounting plate 1400 x Perforated sheet steel Mounting plate 1200 x Mounting plate 1200 x Mounting plate 1200 x Mounting plate 1200 x Mounting plate 1400 x Mounting plate 1400 x Mounting plate 1400 x Mounting plate 1400 x S 29

252 S Industrial enclosures FeRIA SF Floor standing enclosures in sheet steel Packing unit Ref. No. Cabinets with plain door IP55 Mono enclosure Floor standing cabinet 1600 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 1600 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 1600 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1200 x Modular enclosure Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 400 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 400 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 2200 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 2200 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 2200 x 1200 x Cabinets with transparent door IP55 Mono enclosure Floor standing cabinet 1600 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 1600 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 1600 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1200 x S 30

253 Industrial enclosures S FeRIA SF Floor standing enclosures in sheet steel Packing unit Ref. No. Cabinets with transparent door IP55 Side panel Modular enclosure Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 1800 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 400 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 400 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1000 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 2000 x 1200 x Floor standing cabinet 2200 x 600 x Floor standing cabinet 2200 x 800 x Floor standing cabinet 2200 x 1200 x Enclosure Enclosure Dimensions height depth Ref. No. Height Depth (set of 1 piece) Union mounting plate Enclosure Dimensions height Ref. No. Height Width x x x x 965 S 31

254 S Industrial enclosures FeRIA SF Floor standing enclosures in sheet steel Mounting plate Enclosure Enclosure Dimensions height depth Ref. No. Height Depth Bases Enclosure Enclosure Ref. No. Ref. No. width depth height 100 mm height 200 mm 200 (1) (2) (1) for cable connection compartment (2) for cable compartment S 32

255 Industrial enclosures S FeRIA SF Floor standing enclosures in sheet steel Vertical mounting profiles Set of 2 pieces Enclosure Length of Ref. No. Pack height the mounting profile set of 2 pieces Inner door Enclosure Enclosure Useful dimensions height width Ref. No. Height Depth S 33

256 S Industrial enclosures FeRIA SF Accessories Packing unit Ref. No. Locking devices Mounting profiles for mono and modular enclosures Handles 3 mm double bit with key 1242 E with key 2432 E with key 405 E with key 455 E Inserts + keys 3 mm double bit mm square mm square mm square mm triangle mm triangle mm triangle Front standard profile (minimum order quantity = 5 pcs) Mounting profile width 600 mm Mounting profile width 800 mm Mounting profile width 1000 mm Mounting profile width 1200 mm Front large profile (minimum order quantity = 5 pcs) Mounting profile width 600 mm Mounting profile width 800 mm Mounting profile width 1000 mm Mounting profile width 1200 mm Depth standard profile (minimum order quantity = 10 pcs) Mounting profile depth 400 mm Mounting profile depth 500 mm Mounting profile depth 600 mm Mounting profile depth 800 mm Depth large profile (minimum order quantity = 5 pcs) Mounting profile depth 400 mm Mounting profile depth 500 mm Mounting profile depth 600 mm Mounting profile depth 800 mm Door profiles Minimum order quantity = 10 pcs Width of enclosure Width of door Door profile 600 mm 600 mm Door profile 800 mm 800 mm Door profile 1000 mm 1000 mm Door profile 1000 mm 2 x 500 mm Door profile 1200 mm 2 x 600 mm Trafo profiles Set of 2 pieces Trafo profile width 600 mm Trafo profile width 800 mm Trafo profile width 1000 mm Trafo profile width 1200 mm 1 2 x S 34

257 Industrial enclosures S FeRIA SF Accessories Packing unit Ref. No. Adjustment brackets Set of 2 pieces Adjustable 75 to 125 mm Adjustable 150 to 200 mm Door switch Type 114 FC T 21 IP Type 114 FC T 21 T IP Mounting bracket for door switch (complete with screws) Enclosure lighting 220V - 50/60 Hz - 11W With Schuko socket 250V / 16A With CEBEC socket 250V / 16A Cover for lamp Pocket for drawing Adhesif format DIN A Coupling kit Coupling kit for enclosures Coupling kit for heavy duty S 35